FRONTIER 2006 - Light commercial vehicle NISSAN - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL FRONTIER 2006 NISSAN

FOREWORD Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence. It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control. This manual was prepared to help you under- stand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome- ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle. A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties cov- ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” explains details about ma ing and servicing your ve- hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, as well as clarify your rights under your state’s lemon law. Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, they will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them.

READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Before driving your vehicle please read this Own- er's Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, as- sisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle. A WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-

MINDERS FOR SAFETY! Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers! + NEVER drive under the influence of al- cohol or drugs. ALWAYS observe posted EE its and never drive too fast for conditions. ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro- priate child restraint systems. Pre-teen children should be seated in the rear seat. ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle. ALWAYS review this owner's manual for important safety information. For descriptions specified for four-wheel drive models, a EX mark is placed at the begin- ning of the applicable sections/items. As with other vehicles with features for off-road use, failure to operate four-wheel drive models correctly may result in loss of control or an accident. Be sure to read “Driving safety precautions” in the “Start- ing and driving” section of this manual.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING

This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from an ordinary passenger car because it has a higher center of gravity for off-road use. As with other vehicles with features of this type, fail- ure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident. Be sure to read “On-pavement and off- ng precautions”, and “Ave on and rollover”, and “Driving safety precautions”, in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified. Modi- fication could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems result- ing from modifications may not be covered under NISSAN warranties. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all options available on this model. Therefore, you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle. All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design without notice and with- out obligation

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways: A WARNING This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely. À CAUTION This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moder- ate personal injury or damage to your ve- hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro- cedures must be followed carefully. APD1005 If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this” or “Do not let this happen.” H you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra- tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle. ES > | 2 S D Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action. + » t « Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration. CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING A WARNING Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth de- fects or other reproductive harm. In addi- tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. © 2005 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC. GARDENA, CALIFORNIA Al rights reserved. No part of this Owner's Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan North America, Inc., Gar- dena, California. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

NISSAN CARES ... Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs. However, there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions, please contact the NISSAN Con- sumer Affairs Department using our tol-free number: For US. customers 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261) For Canadian customers 1-800-387-0122 The Consumer Affairs Department will ask forthe You can write to NISSAN with the information at: following information For U.S. customers Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.0. Box 191 Gardena, California 90248-0191 For Canadian customers Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5 — Your name, address, and telephone number — Vehicle identification number (attached to the top of the instrument panel on the drivers side) — Date of purchase — Current odometer reading — Your NISSAN dealer's name — Your comments or questions

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

Table of Contents Illustrated table of contents Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Instruments and controls Pre-driving checks and adjustments Heater, air conditioner and audio systems Starting and driving In case of emergency Appearance and care Maintenance and do-it-yourself Technical and consumer information Index

RESTRAINTS And row seat belts (P. 1-12)

2. Supplemental curtain side-impact and

rollover air bags (if so equipped) (P. 1-48)

3. Front seat belts (P. 1-12)

4. Supplemental front impact air bags

6. Occupant classification sensor

8. Supplemental side-impact air bag

(if so equipped) (P. 1-48)

9. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details. W110051 0-2 Illustrated table of contents [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

Engine hood (P. 8-6) Windshield wiper and washer switch (P. 2-23) Windshield (P. 8-21) Windows (P. 2-44) Door locks, keyfob, keys (P.3-3, 3-6, 8-2) Mirrors (P. 3-13) Tire pressure (P. 8-82) Flat tire (P. 6-2) Tire chains (P. 5-33) Headlight and turn signal switch (P. 2-25); Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28) Fog light switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-28) See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details. Illustrated table of contents 0-3 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

(P.2-46) Vehicle loading (P. 9-12) Truck box, tailgate (P.3-15) Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28) Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation (P. 3-10, P. 9-3) See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details. nswoN

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Map lights (P. 2-48) Sun visors (P. 3-12) Inside mirror (P. 3-13) Ventilators (P. 4-2) Glove box (P. 2-38) Shift knob (automatic transmission, if so equipped) (P. 5-11) Cup holders (P. 2-41) Front seats (P. 1-2) Console box (P. 2-38) Rear seats (P. 1-11) Flat tire/Jacking equipment storage (P. 6-2) See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details. DHBEOR =

WICO916) 0-6 Illustrated table of contents Ventilators (P. 4-2) Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn signal switch (P. 2-25) Steering wheel switch for audio control (if so equipped) (P. 4-26) Driver supplemental air bag/hom (P. 1-48, P. 2-29) Meters, gauges and waring/indicator lights (P. 2-8, 2-12) Cruise control main/set switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-18) Windshield wiper/washer switch (P. 2-23) Storage (P. 2-35) Audio system controls (if so equipped) (P.4-10) Front passenger supplemental air bag (P. 1-48) Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-38) Power outlet (P. 2-34) Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-32) Heated seat switches (if so equipped) (P. 2-30) Hill descent control (HDC) switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-31) [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

3. Air cleaner (P. 8-19)

4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)

5. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)

6. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid

reservoir (M/T model) (P. 8-14) 7... Drive belt location (P.8-18)

8. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)

9. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)

10. Battery (P. 8-15)

11. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)

WDI0507 VO4ODE engine Windshield washer fluid reservoir (P.8-15) Battery (P. 8-15) Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-24) Engine oil filer cap (P. 8-2) Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9) Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-14) Air cleaner (P. 8-19) Drive belt location (P.8-18) Radiator cap (P. 8-8) Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-18) .… Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8) See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details. lllustrated table of contents 0-9 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

Warning Name Page Name Page Warning Name Page light light ABS Anti-lock brake | 2-13 Charge warning | 2-14 Ce Low windshield | 2-16 TT warning light light (if so washer fluid G) equipped) waming light = Æ Door open 2-14 4 Seat belt wam- | 2-16 ou | Automatic 2-13 warning light ing light and transmission oil chime temperature 7, Engine oil pres- | 2-14 warning light sure waming Supplemental 2-16 (if so equipped) light (if so air bag warning equipped) light ATP Automatic 2-13 — transmission AWD AWD warning 2-15 park waming light (ex light (ea model) model) e Low fuel wam- | 2-15 Brakel | Brake waming | 2-13 ing light or light @) Low tire pres- 2-15 © L sure waming light 0-10 Illustrated table of contents [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

Seat belts . Child restraints. 1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Seats ......... nosesseseeessseee 1-2 Front manual seat adjustment (if so equipped) ................................1-2 Front power seat adjustment (if so equipped) Jump seat (King cab) . Head restraint adjustment .……...... Active head restraint (front seats)..…. Armrest ..................... Flexible seating. Precautions on seat belt usage Child safety... Pregnant women Injured persons. Three-point type seat belt with retractor. Seat belt extenders … Seat belt maintenance . Precautions on child restraints Child restraint installation on passengers side jump seat (King cab models only)... 1-23 Child restraint installation on rear bench seat (Crew cab models only). 1-29 LATCH (Lower Anchor and Tethers for | CHildren) system.…..........................1-34 Top tether strap child re. restraint ..................1-86 Child restraint installation on front passenger seat... . . . Booster seats. Precautions on booster seats . . Booster seat installation on passenger's ‘side jump seat only (King cab, if so equipped). 1-45 Booster seat installation on rear seat center or outboard 3 positions (Grew cab models only) . ee 1-46 Booster seat installation on front F passenger seat... . Supplemental restraint nt system Precautions on supplemental restraint system . Supplemental air bag warning labels. Supplemental air bag warning light … [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie +

SEATS ARS1152| A WARNING e Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. e For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat properly. See “Precautions on Seat Belt Usage” later in this section. 1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped) A WARNING e Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of con- trol of the vehicle. « After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

WRS0175| WRS0176| Forward and backward Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the seat in position Reclining To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pullthe lever up and lean your body forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position. The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat bel fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped. A WARNING After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

WRS0131 WRS0163| Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver's seat) Tum either dial to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion to the desired position.

ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped) A WARNING e Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of con- trol of the vehicle. + Donotleave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- tivate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in seri- ous accidents. 1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Operating tips © The power seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 80 seconds, then reactivate the switch. e Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery. Forward and backward Moving the switch forward or backward wi slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

Reclining Move the recline switch backward until the de- sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback forward again, move the switch forward and move your body forward. The seatback will move forward The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat bel fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in this section). Also, the seatback can be re- clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve- hicle is stopped. WRS0164|

WRS0389| Seat lifter (driver's seat) Push the front or rear end of the switch up or down to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion. Lumbar support (if so equipped for driver's seat) The lumbar support feature provides lower back support to the driver. Move the lever forward or backward to adjust the seat lumbar area. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

LRS0556| WRS0213| WRS0134| JUMP SEAT (King cab) A WARNING e Do not use a child restraint in the driv- ers side jump seat. This seating posi tion is not suitable for child restraint installation. A child restraint can be in- stalled in the passenger's side jump seat when the seat extension is un- folded from the seat base. e When folding the jump seat, be careful not to squeeze your finger between the seat cushion and the body side.

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT

To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down. The head restraints on the rear seats are remov- able. A WARNING Head restraints should be adjusted prop- erly as they may provide significant pro- tection againsi jury in an accident. Do not remove them. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. 1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Adjust the head restraint so the center is level with the center of your ears. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

SPA1025 ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT (front seats) A WARNING e Always adjust the head restraints prop- erly as specified in the previous section. Failure to do so can reduce the effec- tiveness of the active head restraint. e Active head restraints are designed to supplement other safety systems. Al- ways wear seat belts. No system can prevent all injuries in any accident. e Do not attach anything to the head re- straint stalks. Doing so could impair active head restraint function. The head restraint moves forward utilizing the force that the seatback receives from the occu- pant in a rear-end collision. The movement of the head restraint helps support the occupant's head by reducing its backward movement and helping absorb some ofthe forces that may lead to whip- lash type injuries. Active head restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it is said that whiplash injury occurs most. Active head restraints operate only in certain rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head restraints return to their original positions. Properly adjust the active head restraints as de- scribed earlier in this section. LRSO557| ARMREST To use the center armrest on the 2nd row bench seat, pull on the tab in the center of the seat and fold it down to the resting position. FLEXIBLE SEATING A WARNING + Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seats when they are in the fold-down position. In a col people proper restraints are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. + Do not fold down the rear seats when occupants are in the rear seat area or any luggage is on the rear seats. e Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Always replace and adjust them prop- erly if they have been removed for any reason. e If the head restraints are removed for any reason, they should be securely stored to prevent them from causing injury to passengers or damage to the vehicle in case of sudden braking or an accident. e When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched posi- tion. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an acci- dent or sudden stop. e Properly secure all cargo to help pre- vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. 1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0608 Folding the front passenger's seatback (if so equipped) To fold the front passenger's seatback flat for extra storage length when transporting long items: @ Slide the seat to the rear-most position. Lift up on the recline lever, located on the out- side edge of the seat, and fold the seatback forward as far as it will go. Then lift up on the latch located on the upper comer of the seatback to release the back of the seat. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

LRS0609| @ Once the seatback is released it will enable you to fold the front passenger seatback flat over the seat cushion.

8. To retum the front passenger's seat to a

seating position lift up on the seatback and push it up to an upright position. Then pull up on the recline lever and lean the seatback to à proper seating position. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position. A WARNING e If you fold the front passenger's seat- back flat forward to carry longer ob- jects, be sure this cargo is properly se- cured and not near an air bag. In a crash, an inflating air bag might force that object toward a person. This could cause severe injury or even death. Se- cure objects away from the area in which an air bag would inflate. See “Precautions on supplemental restraint system” later in this section. + Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the front passenger's seat whenitis in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers could re- sult in serious injury in an accident or sudden stop. LRS0398 Folding the rear bench seat To fold the rear bench seat up @ Lift up on the lever, located on the side of the seat, while lifting the front of the seat cushion up. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

LRS0566| LRS0567 @ Fold the bottom of the seat cushion toward the back of the vehicle until it locks in place. © Repeat this process to raise and secure the seat cushion on the other side of the vehicle for maximum storage capacity. To return the rear bench seat to a seating position reverse the process. Make sure to properly push the seat cushion down into place. 1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system A WARNING + When the vehicle is being used to carry cargo, properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seat- backs. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Never ride in the rear seat unless the seat bottom cushions are in place and latched. + When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched posi: tion. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an acci- dent or sudden stop. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

LRS0392| Folding the rear bench seat down The rear bench seatback can be tilted forward to access the child restraint anchor point locations or the jacking equipment. To tilt the seatback forward, pull the strap up © and tilt the seatback. The child restraint anchor points (2) can be accessed behind the rear bench seatback. The jacking equipment can be accessed from behind the passengers side seatback. A WARNING Never allow anyone to ride in area or on the rear seat when i fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury in an acci- dent or sudden stop. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

SEAT BELTS Sit upright and well back. / Ye sS50136)

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE I you are wearing your seat belt properly ad- justed and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat, your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position in- cludes a supplemental air bag. Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven. 1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

Sit upright and weil back. SSS0134 SSS0016| A WARNING « Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be properly re- strained in the rear seat and, if appro- priate, in a child restraint. A WARNING e The seat belt should be properly ad- justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an acci- dent. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

SSS0014 A WARNING e Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the belt behind your back, under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. e Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too increase the risk of internal an accident. Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle. Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness. Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt. Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts. If the seat belt warning light glows con- tinuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a mal- function in the system. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. Once the pre-tensioner seat belt has activated, it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor. See your NISSAN dealer. Removal and installation of the pre- tensioner seat belt system components should be done by a NISSAN dealer. 1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system e All seat belt assemblies, including re- tractors and attaching hardware, Should be inspected after any collision by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom- mends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced un- less the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. e All child restraints and attaching hard- ware should be inspected after any col- lision. Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged. CHILD SAFETY Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly restrained. In addition to the general information in this manual, child safety information is available from many other sources, including doctors, teachers, government traffic safety offices, and community organizations. Every child is different, so be sure to learn the best way to transport your child. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

There are three basic types of child restraint systems: © Rear facing child restraint e_ Front facing child restraint e Booster seat The proper restraint depends on the child's size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 pounds (9 kg) should be placed in rear facing child restraints. Front facing child re- straints are available for children who outgrow rear facing child restraints and are at least one year old. Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a front facing child restraint. A WARNING e Never install a rear facing child restraint in the front passenger’s seat. An inflat- ing supplemental air bag could seri ously injure or kill your child. A rear facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat. e Infants and children need special pro- tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints. AI US. states and Canadian provinces or terri- tories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. See “Child Re- straints” later in this section. Also, there are other types of child restraints available for larger children for additional protec- tion. NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens and children be restrained in the rear seat if available (Crew Cab models). According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys- tem (Air bag system) for the front passen- ger. See “Supplemental restraint system” later in this section. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Infants Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear facing child restraint. NISSAN recom- mends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu- facturer's instructions for installation and use. Small Children Children that are over one year old and weigh between 20 lbs (9 kg) and 40 lbs (18 kgs) can be placed in a forward facing child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations. NISSAN recommends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Mo- tor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for instal- lation and use. Larger children Children who are too large for child restraints should be seated and restrained by the seat belts which are provided. The seat belt may not fit properly if the child is less than 4 feet 9 inches (142.5 cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18 1-15 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

Kg) and 80 lbs (86 kg). À booster seat should be used to obtain proper seat belt fit. NISSAN recommendés that a child be placed in a commercially available booster seat if the shoul- der belt in the child's seating position fits close to the face or neck or if the lap portion of the seat belt goes across the abdomen. The booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the top, middle por- tion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips. À booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three-point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Fed- eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck, use the shoulder belt without the booster seat. A WARNING Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is moving. The child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident or sudden stop. PREGNANT WOMEN NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be wo snug, and always position the lap belt as low as pos- sible around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations. INJURED PERSONS NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WITH RETRACTOR A WARNING « Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. 1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system e Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. + For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

WRS0174 LRS0594| LRSO595) Manual front seat shown Fastening the seat belts (Front seats all models and rear seats Crew cab models) @ Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this section. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor y pi and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. e_Theretractoris designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move, and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat. e Ifthe seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system © Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown. @ Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest. The front passenger seat and the rear seating positions three-point seat belts have a locking mechanism for child restraint installation. It is referred to as the automatic locking mode or child restraint mode. 1-17 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

When the automatic locking mechanism is acti- vated the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. Once retracted, the seat belt is in the emergency locking mode. See “Child restraints” later in this section for more informa- tion. The automatic locking mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by a passen- ger, the locking mode should not be ac: vated. If it is activated it may cause uncom- fortable seat belt tension. It can also change the operation of the front passen- ger air bag. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section. A WARNING When fastening the seat belts, be certain that the seatbacks are completely se- cured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop. Fastening the seat belts (Jump seats King cab models) LRS0556| LRS0569|

1. Open the jump seat. See “Seats” earlier in

this section. 1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. e_ Theretractoris designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move, and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat. e If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

LRS0570| @ Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown. @ Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest. The jump seat positions three-point seat belts have a locking mechanism for child restraint in- stallation. It is referred to as the automatic locking mode or child restraint mode. When the automatic locking mechanism is acti- vated the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. Once retracted, the seat belt is in the emergency locking mode. See “Child restraints” later in this section for more informa- tion. The automatic locking mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by a passen- ger, the locking mode should not be acti- vated. If it is activated it may cause uncom- fortable seat belt tension. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0139| Unfastening the seat belts @ Tounfasten the seat belt, press the button on the buckle. The seat belt automatically re- tracts. Checking seat belt operation Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods: e_ When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the retractor. © When the vehicle slows down rapidly. To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows. 1-19 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

e Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and re- strict further belt movement. Ifthe retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any questions about seat belt opera- tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

LRS0242 Shoulder belt height adjustment (Front seats) The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad- justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau- tions on seat belt usage" earlier in this section.) To adjust, pull out the adjustment button D and move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position (@), so the belt passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoul- der belt anchor into position. 1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system A WARNING e After adjustment, release the adjust- ment button and try to move the shoul- der belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position. «+ The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effec- tiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident.

If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender is available which is compatible with the installed seat belts. The ex- tender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. See a NISSAN dealer for assistance if an extender is required A WARNING e Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment seat belts, should be used with NISSAN seat belts. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

+ Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident. + Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured in a collision or a sud- den stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

e_ To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recom- mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry inthe shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry. ef dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth e Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components, such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors, work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire seat belt as- sembly should be replaced. CHILD RESTRAINTS ARS1098 WRS0256|

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS A WARNING e Infants and small children should al- ways be placed in an appropriate child restraint while ing in the vehicle. Failure to use a child restraint can re- sult in serious injury or death. A WARNING Infants and small children should never be carried on your lap. It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident. The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the same seat belt around both your child and yourself. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

e Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An in- flating supplemental front air bag could si usly injure or kill your child. A rear- facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat. + NISSAN recommends that the child re- straint be installed in the rear seat. Ac- cording to accident statistics, chi are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. e An improperly installed child restraint could lead to serious injury or death in an accident. In general, child restraints are designed to be installed with the lap portion of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, Crew Cab models are equipped with a universal child restraint lower anchor sys- tem, referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these lower anchors. For details, see the “LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) sys- tem” later in this section. Child restraints for infants and small children of various sizes are offered by several manufactur- ers. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind! e_ Choose onlyarestraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. e_ Checkthe childrestraintin your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle's seat and seat belt system. e_Ifthe child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child's height and weight Always follow all recommended procedures. S. states and Canadian provinces or ries require that fants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. A WARNING e Improper use of a child restraint can increase the risk or severity of injury for both the child and other occupants of the vehicle. 1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Follow all of the child restraint manu- facturer's instructions for installation and use. When purchasing a child re- straint, be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle. It may not be possible to properly install some types of child restraints in your vehicle. If the child restraint is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being in- jured in a col n or a sudden stop greatly increases. Adjustable seatbacks should be posi- tioned to fit the child restraint, but as upright as possible. After attaching the child res: before you place the child from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm). If the restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as necessary, or put the int in another seat and test it You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

e If you must install a front facing child restraint in the front seat, see “Child restraint installation on front passenger seat” later in this section. e When your child restraint is not in use, keep it secured with a seat belt to pre- vent it from being thrown around in case of a sudden stop or accident. A CAUTION Remember that a child restraint left in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the child restraint.

SEAT (King cab models only) A WARNING e The three-point seat belt in your vehicle is equipped with an automatic locking mode retractor which must be used when installing a child restraint. e Failure to use the retractors locking mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The re- straint could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRSO598 A WARNING + Wheninstalling a child restraint system the passenger’s side jump seat posi- n be sure to unfold the seat exten- sion on the jump seat. If the jump seat extension is not properly used, the child restraint will not be installed correctly and the child could be injured in a col- lision or sudden stop. Never install a child restraint on the driver's side jump seat. A child restraint can not be properly installed in the driv- er's side jump seat and the child could be injured in a collision or sudden stop. 1-23 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

LRS0559| [Q] LRS0537 LRSO540 Front facing When you install a child restraint on the passen- ger's side jump seat, follow these steps:

1. To access the jump seat extension(Don the

passenger's side jump seat pull up @) on the extension to unfold it to the open posi- tion. Then unfold the two support legs @and lower the jump seat to the full open @seating position. 1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Front facing (passenger’s side seating po- ition only) — step 2 @ Remove the head restraint to obtain the cor- rect child restraint fit. See “Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this section. Store the head restraint in a secure place. Be sure to install the head restraint when the child re- straint is removed. Position the child restraint on the seat. lt can be placed in a front facing direction, depending on the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturer's instructions. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seat back. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

LRSO541 LRS0542 LRSO574 Front Facing — step 3 ® Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manu- facturer's instructions for belt routing, Front Facing — step 4 @)_ Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts back to emergency locking mode when the seat belt is fully retracted. Front Facing — step 5 © Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the Shoulder belt to remove any slack in the bel. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

LRS0575 Front Facing — step 6 ® Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to push the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. lt should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm). If it does move more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull again on the shoulder belt to further tighten the child restraint. If unable to properly secure the restraint move the restraint to another seating position and try again , or try a differ- ent child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check that the retractor is in the automatic

locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is in the automatic locking mode.

8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. Ifthe belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 7. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled. 1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRSO597 Rear facing A WARNING e Do not install a child restraint system on the passenger’s side jump seat wi out unfolding the seat extender. A child restraint system will not be installed properly and the child could be seri- ously injured or killed in a sudden stop [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

LRS0549| [Q] LRS0559| LRS0537 A WARNING To install a rear facing child restraint on the passenger’s side jump seat, it will be necessary to move the front passen- ger's seat fully forward and place the front seatback upright or tilt it forward. The front seat cannot be used. Attempt- ing to do so could lead to serious injury in a sudden stop or crash. When you install a child restraint on the passen- ger's side jump seat, follow these steps:

To access the jump seat extension(Don the passenger's side jump seat only pull up @) on the extension to unfold it to the open position. Then unfold the two support legs @and lower the jump seat to the full open @seating position. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

LRS0544 LRS0545 LRSO546 Rear Facing (passenger’s side jump seat only) — step 2 @ Move the front passengers seat into the FULL FORWARD position. Then move the front seatback to the upright or tilted forward position. Position the child restraint on the jump seat. The direction of the child restraint depends on the type of the child restraint and the size of the child. Always follow the restraint manufacturer's instructions. Rear Facing — step 3 ® Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manu- facturer’ instructions for belt routing. 1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Rear Facing — step 4 @ Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to emer- gency locking mode when the seat belt is fully retracted. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

LRS0547 Rear Facing — step 5 @ Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. Rear Facing — step 6 © Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to push the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. lt should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm). If it does move more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull again on the shoulder belt to further tighten the child restraint. If unable to properly secure the restraint move the restraint to another seating position and try again , or try a differ- ent child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

7. Check that the retractor is in the automatic

locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more seat belt webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is in the automatic locking mode.

8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. Ifthe belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 7 After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION

ON REAR BENCH SEAT (Crew cab models only) A WARNING e The three-point seat belt in your vehicle is equipped with an automatic locking mode retractor which must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the retractor’s locking mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The re- straint could tip over or otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or collision. 1-29 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

LRS0599 LRS0573 WRS0250 Front Facing (center) — step 1 Front Facing (outboard) — step 1 Front facing When you install a child restraint on the rear bench seat, follow these steps: @ Position the child restraint on the seat. AI- ways follow the restraint manufacturer's in- structions. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seat- back. Remove the head restraint to obtain the correct child restraint fit. See “Head re- straint adjustment” earlier in this section. Store the head restraint in a secure place. Be sure to install the head restraint when the child restraint is removed 1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Front Facing — step 2 @ Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manu- facturer's instructions for belt routing. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

LRS0458 LRS0457 WRS0252 Front Facing — step 3 @ Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). lt reverts back to emergency locking mode when the seat belt is fully retracted Front Facing — step 4 Front Facing — step 5 @ Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the (®) Before placingthe childinthe child restraint, shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. use force to push the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. It should not move more than 1 inch (25mm). If it does move more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull again on the shoulder belt to further tighten the child restraint. If unable to properly secure the restraint move the restraint to another seating position and try again , or try a differ- ent child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in ll types of vehicles. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic

locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is in the automatic locking mode.

7. Checkto make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. the belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled. LRS0600 LRS0403 Rear Facing (center) — step 1 1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Rear Facing (outboard) — step 1 Rear facing When you install a child restraint on the rear bench seat, follow these steps: @ Position the child restraint on the seat. AI- ways follow the restraint manufacturer's in- structions. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

LRS0489 LRS0490 LRSO491 Rear Facing — step 2 @ Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manu- facturer's instructions for belt routing, Rear Facing — step 3 @)_ Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to emer- gency locking mode when the seat belt is fully retracted. Rear Facing — step 4 @ Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the Shoulder belt to remove any slack in the bel. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

LRS0492 Rear Facing — step 5 ® Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to push the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. lt should not move more than 1 inch (25mm). If it does move more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull again on the shoulder belt to further tighten the child restraint. If unable to properly secure the restraint move the restraint to another seating position and try again , or try a differ- ent child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic

locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more seat belt webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is in the automatic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. Ifthe belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled. 1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system CRE LRS0429 LATCH system anchor point locations rear bench seat (Crew cab models only) LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM The LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHlildren) anchor points are located in the seat cushions of the rear outboard seating positions only (Crew cab models only). Do not attempt to install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH anchors. The LATCH system anchors are located at the rear of the seat cushion near the seatback. À label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the LATCH system anchors. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

LRS0571 LATCH anchor point labels rear bench seat (Crew cab models only) A WARNING e Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown. If a child restraint is not secured properly, your child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident. e The LATCH system anchors are de- signed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child re- straints. Under no circumstance are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses. Some child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be con- nected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. This system is known as the LATCH system. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH system compat- ible child restraints. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with the LATCH system. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer. If you have such a child restraint, refer to the illustration for the seating positions equipped with LATCH system anchors which can be used to secure the child restraint. LATCH child restraints generally require the use of a top tether strap. See “Top tether strap child restraint” later in this section for installation in- structions. When installing a child restraint, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint When you install a LATCH system compatible child restraint to the lower anchor attachments, follow these steps: Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system A WARNING Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor area and feeling to make sure there are no obstructions over the LATCH system an- chors, such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not be secured properly if the LATCH sys- tem anchors are obstructed.

1. To install the LATCH system compatible

child restraint, insert the child restraint LATCH system anchor attachments into the anchor points on the seat. If the child re- straint is equipped with a top tether, see “Top tether strap child restraint” later in this section for installation instructions.

2. After attaching the child restraint and before

placing the child in it, use force to push the child restraint from side to side and tug it forward to make sure that the child restraint is securely held in place. lt should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm)

3. Check to make sure that the child restraint is

RESTRAINT H your child restraint has a top tether strap, it must be secured to the provided anchor point. Secure the child restraint with a seat belt. Secure the top tether strap to the anchor bracket which provides the straightest installation of the tether strap Tighten the strap according to the manufactur- er's instructions to remove any slack. A WARNING Child restraint anchor points are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses. If you have any questions when installing a top strap child restraint on the passenger's side jump seat, consult your NISSAN dealer for details. LRSO551 Anchor point access (King cab models — passenger's side jump seat)

Anchor point location (King cab models, passenger's side jump seat) The anchor point is located on the floor between the jump seat belt buckles in the center of the vehicle. The routing bracket is located behind the cover plate under the rear window above the right passenger's side jump seat. 1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

A WARNING Do not secure the top tether strap to the routing bracket. If the child restraint is not anchored properly, the risk of a child be- ing injured in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases. Pull the cover plate off to access the top tether strap routing bracket for the passenger's side jump seat. Route the top tether strap through the routing bracket. Then pull the top tether strap tight and secure it to the top tether anchor bracket located between the seat belt buckle receivers in the center of the vehicle. WRS0210 Anchor point label Anchor point location (King cab models, front passenger's seat) Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

LRS0572 LRS0393| LRS0392 Top tether strap routing (King cab models only — front passenger’s seat)

The anchor point is located on the back of seat- back for the front passenger's seat as shown. Raise the head restraint. Route the top tether strap under the head restraint and secure it to the anchor point location on the back ofthe seatback near the seat base. 1f you have any questions when installing a top strap child restraint on the front pas- senger’s seat, consult your NISSAN dealer for details. Anchor point locations (Crew cab models only) The anchor points are located under the rear window behind the rear bench seat. If you have any questions when installing a top strap child restraint on the rear seat, consult your NISSAN dealer for details. 1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Anchor point access (Crew cab models only)

2. Anchor point location

To access the anchor points behind the rear bench seat, tit the rear seatback forward by lifting up on the pull strap behind the seat back. Remove the head restraint and store it in a secure place. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

A WARNING e Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat. Supplemental front air bags in- flate with great force. A rear-facing child restraint could be struck by the supplemental front air bag in a crash and could seriously injure or kill your child. ° NISSAN recommends that child re- straints be installed in the rear seat. However, if you must install a forward facing child restraint in the front pas- senger seat, move the passenger seat to the rearmost position. Also, be sure the front passenger air bag status light illuminated to indicate the passenger bag is OFF. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this sec- tion for details. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

e A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passen- ger's seat unless the vehicle is a King Cab model only. The three-point seat belt in your vehicle is equipped with an automatic locking mode retractor which must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the retractors locking mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The re- straint could tip over otherwise be unsecured and cause injury to the child in a sudden stop or coll n. AISO, it can change the operation of the front pas- senger air bag. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section. Move seat fully back WRS0379 Front Facing — step 1 If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, follow these steps: @ Position the child restraint on the front pas- senger seat. It should be placed in a front-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Adjust the head restraint to its highest position. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's in- structions. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direc- tion and therefore must not be used in the front seat. 1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seat back. If necessary, adjust or remove the head re- straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit. See “Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this section. If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to install the head restraint when the child restraint is removed. If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or à different child restraint [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie +

WRS0159 WRS0160 LRSO457 Front Facing — step 2 @ Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manu- facturer's instructions for belt routing, Front Facing — step 3 @)_ Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to emer- gency locking mode when the seat belt is fully retracted. Front Facing — step 4 @ Allow the seat belt to retract slightly. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

WRS0380 Front Facing — step 5 ® Before placing the child in the child restraint, use force to push the child restraint from side to side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is securely held in place. lt should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm). If it does move more than 1 inch (25 mm), pull again on the shoulder belt to further tighten the child restraint. If unable to properly secure the restraint move the restraint to another seating position and try again , or try a differ- ent child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic

locking mode by trying to pull more seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is in the automatic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.

8. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position

The passenger air bag status light #_ should illuminate. If this light is not illuminated see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in this section. Move the child restraint to another seating posi- tion. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) is canceled. 1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system BOOSTER SEATS

PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER

SEATS A WARNING e Infants and small children should al- ways be placed in an appropriate child restraint while riding in the vehicle. Failure to use a child restraint or booster seat can result in serious injury or death. + Infants and small children should never be carried on your lap. It is not possible for even the strongest adult to resist the forces of a severe accident. The child could be crushed between the adult and parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the Same seat belt around both your child and yourself. + NISSAN recommends that the booster seat be installed in the rear seat. Ac- cording to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap/shoulder belt. Failure to use a three-point type seat belt a booster seat can result in a serious in- jury in sudden stop or coll n. An improperly install booster seat could lead to serious injury or death in an accident. When installing a booster seat in the passenger’s side jump seat position be sure to unfold the seat extension on the jump seat. If the jump seat extension is not properly used, the booster seat will not be installed correctly and a child Never drivers side jump seat. A child restraint can not be properly installed in the driv- er’s side jump seat and the child could be injured in a col n or sudden stop. LRS0455| LRSO538 A WARNING e Do not use towels, books, pillows or other items in place of a booster seat. Items such as these may move during normal driving or a collision and result in serious injury or death. Booster seats are designed to be used with a lap/shoulder belt. Booster seats are de- signed to properly route the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt over the strongest portions of a child’s body to provide the maximum protection dur- ing a collision. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any booster seat, keep the following points in mind: © Choose only a booster seat with a label certiying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 e_ Checkthe booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle's seat and seat belt system. 1-43 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

LRS0539| Make sure the child's head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat. The seat back must be at or above the center of the child's ears. For example, if a low back booster seat (1) is chosen, the vehicle seat back must be at or above the center of the child's ears. Ifthe seat back is lower than the center of the child's ears, a high back booster seat (2) should be used. e_Ifthe booster seat is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with your child. Always follow all recommended pro- cedures. AII U.S. states and Canadian provinces or nfants and small an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. A WARNING ° Improper use of a booster seat can in- crease the risk or severity of injury for both the child and other occupants of the vehicle. + Follow all of the booster seat manufac- turers instructions for installation and use. When purchasing a booster seat, be sure to select one which will fit your child and vehicle. It may not be possible to properly install some types of booster seats in your vehicle. + If the booster seat and seat belt is not used properly, the risk of a child being injured in a collision or a sudden stop greatly increases. e Adjustable seatbacks should be posi- tioned to fit the booster seat, but as upright as possible. 1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system e After placing the child in the booster seat and fastening the seat belt, make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child’s face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the abdomen. + Do not put the shoulder belt behind the child or under the child’s arm. If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, see “Booster seat installation on front passenger seat” later in this section. + When your booster seat is not in use, k secured with a seat belt to pre- vent it from being thrown around in case of a sudden stop or accident. ACAUTION Remember that a booster seat left in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the booster seat. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

ONLY (King cab, if so equipped) A WARNING e When installing a booster seat in the passenger’s side jump seat position be sure to unfold the seat extension on the jump seat. If the jump seat extension is not properly used, the booster seat will not be installed correctly and a child could be injured in a collision or sudden stop. + Never install a booster seat on the driv- er’s side jump seat. A child restraint can not be properly installed in the drivers side jump seat and a child could be jured in a collision or sudden stop. ACAUTION Do not use the lap/shoulder belt auto- matic locking mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts. When you install a booster seat on the jump seat follow these steps: [Q] LRS0559| LRS0537

1. To access the jump seat extension(Don the

passenger's side jump seat only pull up @) on the extension to unfold it to the open position. Then unfold the two support legs @and lower the jump seat to the full open @seating position. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only

place it in a front facing direction. Always follow the booster seat manufacturer's in- structions. . The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If neces- sary, adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct booster seat fit. See “Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this section. If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to install the head restraint when the booster seat is removed. If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child's hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer's in- structions for adjusting the belt routing . Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the child's shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer's instructions for adjusting the belt routing. . Follow the wamings, cautions and instruc- tions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in the “Three-point seat belt with retractor” earlier in this section. 1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRSO563 Outboard position

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ON

OUTBOARD POSITIONS (Crew cab models only) À CAUTION Do not use a lap/shoulder belt automatic locking mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts. When you install a booster seat in the rear seat follow these steps: [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

LRS0596 Center position

1. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only

place it in a front facing direction. Always follow the booster seat manufacturer's in- structions. . The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If neces- sary, adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct booster seat fit. See “Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this section. If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to install the head restraint when the booster seat is removed. If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child's hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer's in- structions for adjusting the belt routing . Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the child's shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer's instructions for adjusting the belt routing. . Follow the wamings, cautions and instruc- tions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in the “Three-point seat belt with retractor” earlier in this section. LRS0454|

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION ON

A WARNING NISSAN recommends that child restraints be installed in the rear seat. However, if you must install a booster seat in the front passenger seat, move the passengers seat to the rearmost position. If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, follow these steps:

1. Move the seat to the rear-most position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only

place it in a front facing direction. Always follow the booster seat manufacturer's in- structions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned on

the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If neces- sary, adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct booster seat fit. See “Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this section. If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to install the head restraint when the booster seat is removed. If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low

and snug on the child's hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer's in- structions for adjusting the belt routing.

5. Pullthe shoulder belt portion of the seat belt

toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the child's shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer's instructions for adjusting the belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-

tions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in the “Three-point seat belt with retractor” earlier in this section.

7. Whentheignition switch is turned to the ON

position, the passenger air bag status light # may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the type of booster seat being used. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section. 1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec- tion contains important information concerning the driver and passenger supplemental front air bags (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System), supplemental side air bags, curtain side-impact and rollover air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts. Supplemental front impact air bag system: The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions. Supplemental side-impact air bag system (if so equipped): This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact colli- sions. The front seat side-impact supplemental side air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. Supplemental curtain side-impact and roll- over air bag system (if so equipped): This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side impact or rollover collisions. In a side impact, the curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

vehicle is impacted. In a rollover both curtain air bags are designed to inflate and remain inflated for a short time. These supplemental restraint systems are de- signed to supplement the crash protection pro- vided by the seat belts and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable dis- tance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. See “Seat belts” earlier in this section for instructions and precautions on seat belt usage. The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position. After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. Sit upright and well back. 7 WRS0031 A WARNING e The supplemental front air bags ordi- narily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help uce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents. The front passenger air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status or if the front passenger seat is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in this section. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

e The seat belts and the supplemental front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The front air bags inflate with great force. Even with the NISSAN Ad- vanced Air Bag System, if you are unre- strained, leaning forward, sitting side- ways or out of posi in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the supplemental front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practi- cal from the steering wheel or instru- ment panel. Always use the seat belts. e The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The advanced air bag system monitors the severity of a coll n and seat belt us- age then inflates the air bags. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. e The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this seat. Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an acci- dent. See “Front Passenger air bag and status light” later in this section. + Keep hands on the outside of the steer- ing wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the supplemental front air bag inflates. 1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

Sit upright and well back. ARS1133 ARS1041| A WARNING + Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

ARS1042| ARS1043 A WARNING e Children may be severely injured or killed when the supplemental front air bags, side air bags or curtain side- impact and rollover air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. Pre- teens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible. 1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

ARS1045| WRS0256| WRS0431 A WARNING e Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An in- flating supplemental front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. See “Child restraints” earlier in this section for details. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Do not lean against the door. A WARNING Supplemental side air bag (if so equipped) and curtain side-impact and rollover air bag (if so equipped): lemental side air bag and cur- pact and rollover air bag will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents. 1-53 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

LRS0396 SSS0162 Do not lean against doors or windows. Do not lean against doors or windows. 1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system A WARNING e The seat belts, the supplemental side air bags and curtain side-impact and rollover air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and up- right in the seat. The side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone si g in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previ- ous illustrations. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

LRS0421| SSS0159) A WARNING When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations. Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with supplemental side air bag inflation. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

LRS0565| 1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SRS curtain side-impact and rollover air bag modules (if so equipped) SRS curtain side-impact and rollover air bag (if so equipped) Diagnosis sensor unit Supplemental front air bag modules Crash zone sensor Occupant classification system control unit Occupant classification sensor (pres- sure sensor) Satellite sensors Seat belt buckle switches Pre-tensioner retractor Supplemental side air bag modules (if 50 equipped) NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System (front seats) This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN ad- vanced air bag system for the driver and front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U.S. regu- lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However, all of the information, cautions and warn- ings in this manual still apply and must be followed. 10/14/05—debbie 1 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna)

The driver supplemental front air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger supplemental front air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. The supplemen- tal front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although they may in- flate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental front air bag system operation: The NISSAN advanced air bag system has dual stage inflators. lt also monitors information from the crash zone sensor, the diagnosis sensor unit, seat belt buckle sensors, occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor) and passenger seat belt tension sensor. Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For the front passenger, it additionally monitors the weight of an occupant or object on the seat and seat belt tension. Based on informa- tion from the sensors, only one front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air bag may be automatically turmed OFF under some conditions, depending on the weight de- tected on the passenger seat and how the seat belt is used. the front passenger air bag is OFF, the passenger air bag status light will be illumi- nated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See “Front passenger air bag and status light" later in this section for further details. One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system. H you have any questions about your air bag system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN dealer. F you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner's Manual. When a supplemental front air bag inflates, a fairy loud noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and chok- ing. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. Supplemental front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body. Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and pas- Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system senger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The supplemental front air bagg inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the front air bag module during inflation. The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision. The supplemental front air bags operate n switch is in the ON After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. 1-57 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

WRS0475| Front passenger air bag and status light A WARNING The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF under some con- ditions. Read this section carefully to learn how it operates. Proper use of the seat, seat belt and child restraints is nec- essary for most effective protection. Fail- ure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. Status light The front passenger air bag status light Æ# is located near the climate controls. The light oper- ates as follows: e Unoccupied passenger's seat: The Æ# is OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF and wil not inflate in a crash. e_ Passenger’s seat ocoupied by a small adult, child or child restraint as outlined in this section: The: _ illuminates to indicate that the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash. _ Occupied passenger seat and the passen- ger meet the conditions outlined in this sec- tion: The light # is OFF to indicate that the front passenger air bag is operational. Front passenger air bag The front passenger air bag is designed to auto- matically tum OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system. The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger seat occupants, such 1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto- matically tumed OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the requirements. One sensor used is the occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor). ltis in the bottom of the front passenger seat cushion and is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat by weight. lt works together with seat belt sensors described later. For example, if a child is in the front passenger seat, the advanced air bag sys- tem is designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the type specified in the regula- tions is on the seat, its weight and the child's weight can be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF. Occupant classification sensor opera- tion can vary depending on the front passenger seat belt sensors. The front passenger seat belt sensors are de- signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and the amount of tension on the seat belt, such as when it is in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode). Based on the weight on the seat detected by the occupant classification sensor and the belt tension detected on the seat belt, the advanced air bag system determines whether the front pas- senger air bag should be automatically tumed OFF as required by the regulations. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as out- lined in this manual should not cause the passen- ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush- ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupant improperly uses the seat belt in the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode), this could cause the air bag to be tumed OFF. Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag. NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil- dren be properly restrained in a rear seat NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat. Ifthis is not possible, the occupant classification sensor and seat belt sensors are designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag OFF for specified child restraints as required by the regulations. Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the automatic locking mode (child restraint mode) may allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or sudden stop. This can also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. See “Child restraints” earlier in this section for proper use and installation. If the front passenger seat is not occupied the passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation, because of the object's weight detected by the occupant classification sensor. Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is standing on the seat, or if two children are on the seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly. Using the passenger air bag status light, you can monitor when the front passenger air bag is au- tomatically tumed OFF with the seat occupied. The light will not iluminate when the front pas- senger seat is unoccupied. Ifan adult occupant is in the seat but the passen- ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat properly or not using the seat belt properly. a child restraint must be used in the front seat, the passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used. I the passenger air bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that the air bag might inflate in a Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used properly. In rare cases, the passenger air bag status light will not illuminate even though the air bag is OFF. H such situations happen, properly position and restrain the occupant or child restraint. Other- wise reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat. If you have any questions about whether your passenger air bag is working as designed, your NISSAN dealer can confirm that it is working properly by using a special tool The air bag system and passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the passenger seat status. For example, if a large adult who is sitting in the front passenger seat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bag status light will go from OFF to ON for a few seconds and then to OFF. This is normal system operation and does not indicate a malfunction. If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system, the supplemental air bag warning light RE. located in the meter and gauges area in the center of the instrument panel, will blink. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. 1-59 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

Other supplemental front air bag precau- tions A WARNING e Do not place any objects on the steer- ing wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such ob- jects may become dangerous projec- tiles and cause injury if the supplemen- tal front air bag inflates. e Immediately after inflation, several front air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may se- verely burn yourself. e No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system. e Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle’s electrical system, sus- pension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. + Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above th: istrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system. e Modifying or tampering with the front passenger seat may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing mate- rial on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, on the seat that are not speci cally designed to assure proper air bag operation. Additionally, do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback. Such objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classifica- tion sensor (pressure sensor). e No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system. This may affect the supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury. 1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system e Work on and around the supplemental front air bag system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electri- cal equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. The Supplemental Re- straint System (SRS) wiring should not be modified or disconnected. Unautho- rized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system. e A cracked windshield should be re- placed immediately by a qualified re- pair facility. A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system. e The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the supplemental front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropri- ate sections in this Owner's Manual. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

WRS0422| Supplemental side-impact air bag and curtain side-impact and rollover air bags system (if so equipped) The supplemental side-impact air bags are lo- cated in the outside of the seatback of the front seats. The supplemental curtain side-impact and rollover air bags are located in the side roof rails. These systems are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occupants. However, all of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed. The supplemental side air bags and curtain side- impact and rollover air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity side impact. They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions. Curtain side-impact and rollover air bags are also designed to inflate in certain types of rollover collisions or near rollovers. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact and rollover air bag op- eration. When the supplemental side air bag and curtain air bag inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptiy. Supplemental side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the chest of the front occupants. Curtain side- impact and rollover air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. How- ever, an inflating side air bag, or curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Supple- Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system mental side air bags and curtain side-impact and rollover air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body. The seat belts should be correctiy worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the supplemental side air bag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finishers and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain side-impact and rollover air bag inflate quickly in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bag and curtain air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation. The side air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over. The curtain side-impact and rollover air bag will remain inflated for a short time. The supplemental side air bags and curtain side-impact and rollover air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions. After turning the ignition key to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning uminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational. 1-61 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

A WARNING e Do not place any objects near the seat- back of the front seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental side air bag inflates. e Right after inflation, several side air bag and curtain side-impact and rollover air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself. e No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain air bag or damage to the side air bag and curtain air bag system. e Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle’s electrical system, sus- pension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the supplemental curtain air bag system. e Tampering with the supplemental side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing mate- rial near the seatbacks or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag. e Work around and on the curtain air bag system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equip- ment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be mod or discon- nected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag or cur- tain air bag system.

• The SRS wiring harness or connectors are yellow or orange for easy identification. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the supplemental side air bag and curtain air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual. 1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Pre-tensioner seat belt system (Front seats) A WARNING e The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be reused after activation. It must be re- placed together with the retractor and buckle as a unit. e If the vehicle becomes involved in a frontal collision but the pre-tensioner is not activated, be sure to have the pre- tensioner system checked and, if nec- essary, replaced by your NISSAN dealer. e No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pre-tensioner seat belt system. This is to prevent accidental activation of the pre-tensioner seat belt or damage to the pre-tensioner seat belt operation. Tampering with the pre-tensioner seat belt system may result in serious per- sonal injury. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

e Work around and on the pre-tensioner system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equip- ment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pre-tensioner seat belt system. e If you need to dispose of the pre- tensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Correct pre-tensioner disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury. The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt system activates in conjunction with the front supple- mental air bag systems. Working with the seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occu- pants. The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belt's retractor. These seat belts are used the same as conventional seat belts. When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptiy. After the pre-tensioner seat belts have activated, load limiters allow the seat belt to release web- bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the chest. I any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensioner system, the supplemental air bag warning light Æ will not come on, will flash intermit- tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on afterthe ignition key has been tumed to the ON or START position. In this case, the pre-tensioner seat belt may not function properly. They must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat belt system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS0397

SRS Air bag warning labels The waming labels are located on the sur- face of the sun visor. SRS Side air bag waming label (if so equipped) The warning label is located on the side of the passenger's side center pillar. 1-63 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

WARNING LABELS Warning labels about the supplemental front air bags and supplemental side-impact and rollover air bag systems are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

WARNING LIGHT The supplemental air bag waming light, displaying in the instrument panel, moni- tors the circuits of the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side-impact air bag and curtain side-impact and rollover air bag and pre- tensioner seat belt systems. The circuits moni- tored by the supplemental air bag waming light are the diagnosis sensor unit, crash zone sensor, satellite sensors, rollover sensor, front air bag modules, side air bag modules, curtain air bag modules, pre-tensioner seat belts and all related wiring. 1-64 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system When the ignition key is in the ON or START position, the supplemental air bag warning light iluminates for about 7 seconds and then tums off. This means the system is operational. IH any of the following conditions occur, the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag, curtain air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt systems need servicing © The supplemental air bag warning light re- mains on after approximately 7 seconds. e The supplemental air bag waming light flashes intermittenty. e_ The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all. Under these conditions, the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bags and curtain air bag or pre-tensioner seat belt systems may not operate properly. It must be checked and re- paired. Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie +

A WARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag, curtain air bag systems and/or pre- tensioner seat belt systems will not oper- ate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. Repair and replacement procedure The supplemental front air bags, supplemental side air bags, curtain air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts are designed to inflate on a one-time- only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred. Repair and replacement of these supplemental air bag systems should be done only by a NISSAN dealer. When maintenance work is required on the ve- hicle, the supplemental front air bags, supple- mental side air bags, curtain air bags, pre- tensioner seat belts and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the mainte- nance. The ignition key should always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle.

A WARNING Once a supplemental front bag, supplemental side air bag or curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be re- placed. Additionally, if any of the Supplemental front air bags inflate, the activated pre-tensioner seat belts must also be replaced. The air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt system Should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer. The air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt system cannot be repaired. The supplemental front air bag, side air bag and curtain air bag systems, and the pre-tensioner seat belt system should be inspected by a NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle. If you need to dispose of the supple- mental air bag, pre-tensioner seat belt system or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Correct supplemental air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt sys- tem disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65 10/14/05—debbie 1 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna)

WICO916) 2-2 Instruments and controls Ventilators (P. 4-2) Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn signal switch (P. 2-25) Steering wheel switch for audio control (if so equipped) (P. 4-26) Driver supplemental air bag/hom (P. 1-48, P. 2-29) Meters, gauges and waring/indicator lights (P. 2-8, 2-12) Cruise control main/set switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-18) Windshield wiper/washer switch (P. 2-23) Storage (P. 2-35) Audio system controls (if so equipped) (P.4-10) Front passenger supplemental air bag (P. 1-48) Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-38) Power outlet (P. 2-34) Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-82) Heated seat switches (if so equipped) (P. 2-30) Hill descent control (HDC) switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-31) [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

8. Speedometer 7... Engine oil pressure gauge (if so

Speedometer The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour (km/h). 2-4 Instruments and controls Odometer/Twin trip odometer The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed when the ignition key is in the ON position. The odometer records the total distance the ve- hicle has been driven. The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual tips.

EE: LICO780 With twin trip odometer Changing the display: For vehicles equipped with twin trip odometer, pushing the change button changes the display as follows: TipCA] — TipCE-] — Tip[A] [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

- Ag HP\ El CE ne ol La LICO781 With trip computer For vehicles equipped with trip computer, push- ing the change button changes the display as follows: Tip[A ] — Trip — Distance to Empty — Average speed — Average fuel consumption — Journey time — Trip For additional information, refer to “Trip com- puter' later in this section. Resetting the trip odometer: Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec- ond resets the trip odometer to zero. TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped) The display of the trip computer is situated in the speedometer display. When the ignition is turned &0 ON, the display scrolls all the modes ofthe trip computer and then shows the mode chosen be- fore the ignition switch was turned OFF. When the ignition switch is tumed to ON, modes of the trip computer can be selected by pushing the trip computer change button. The following modes can be selected Distance to empty (dte—mile or km) The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling. The dte is constantly be- ing calculated, based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display is updated every 30 seconds. The dte mode includes a low range warning feature: when the fuel level is low, the dte mode is automatically selected and the digits blink in or- der to draw the drivers attention. Press the change button if you wish to retum to the mode that was selected before the warning occurred The dte mark (dte) will remain blinking until the vehicle is refueled When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte display will change to (----). NOTE: e _lf the amount of fuel added while the ignition switch is OFF is small, the dis- play just before the on switch turned OFF may continue to be dis- played. e When driving uphill or rounding curves, the fuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarily change the display. Average speed (MPH or km/h) The average speed mode shows the average vehicle speed since last reset. Resetting is done by pressing the change button for more than approximately 1 second. The display is updated every 30 seconds. The first 30 seconds after a reset, the display shows (----). Average fuel consumption (Mpg or 1/100km) The average fuel consumption mode shows the average fuel consumption since the last reset. Resetting is done by pressing the change button for more than approximately 1 second. The dis- play is updated every 30 seconds. At about the first 1/8 miles (500 m) after a reset, the display shows (----) Instruments and controls 2-5 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

Journey time The journey time mode shows the time since the last reset. The displayed time can be reset by pressing the change button for more than ap- proximately 1 second. Trip computer reset Pushing the change button for more than 3 sec- onds will reset all modes except Trip À and dis- tance to empty (dte). 2-6 Instruments and controls LICO738] LICO739] TACHOMETER The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo- lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine into the red zone (©). À CAUTION When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera- ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range @ when the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illustration. The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

À CAUTION If the gauge indicates coolant tempera- ture near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature. If the gauge is over the nor- mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is over- heated, continued operation of the ve- hicle may seriously damage the engine. See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section for immediate action required. LICO740] FUEL GAUGE The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank. The gauge may move slightly during braking, tuning, acceleration, or going up or down hills. The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the ignition key is tumed to OFF. The low fuel warning light comes on when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low. Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis- ters E (Empty). The 4ÿ _ indicates that the fuel-filler door is located on the drivers side of the vehicle. À CAUTION ef the vehicle runs out of fuel, the ÈNE malfunction indicator light (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving 1, the QE light should turn off. If the light remains on after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. e For additional information, see “Mal- function indicator light (MIL)” later in this section. Instruments and controls 2-7 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

LICO741| ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE (if so equipped) The gauge indicates the engine lubrication sys- tem oil pressure while the engine is running. When the engine speed is high, the engine oil pressure is also high. When the engine speed is low, the gauge may indicate low oil pressure. À CAUTION e This gauge is not designed to indicate low engine oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. (See “Engine oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.) 2-8 Instruments and controls + Ifthe gauge needle does not move with the proper amount of engine oil, have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer. Continued vehicle operation in such a condition could cause serious damage to the engine. WICO913 VOLTMETER (if so equipped) When the ignition key is tumed to the ON posi- tion, the voltmeter indicates the battery voltage. When the engine is running, it indicates the gen- erator voltage While cranking the engine, the volts drop below the normal range. If the needle is not in the normal range (11 - 15 volts) D while the engine is running, it may indicate that the charging system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

TEMPERATURE DISPLAY (if so equipped) This unit has the following functions: © When the outside temperature is between 140°F (60°C) and 194°F (90°C), the display will read 140°F (60°C). When the tempera- ture is above 194°F (90°C), the display will read “SC” e Measures terrestrial magnetism and indi- cates heading direction of vehicle e_ Indicates outside air temperature With the ignition switch in the ON position, press the -$- button as described in the chart below to activate various features of the automatic anti- glare review mirror. e When the outside temperature is between -40°F (-40°C) and -60°F (-51°C), the dis- play will read -40°F (-40°C). When the tem- perature is below -60°F (-51°C), the display will read “OC”. Push and hold Feature: the -N- {Push button again for about 1 sec- © The outside temperature sensor is located in button for about: | ond to change settings) front of the radiator. The sensor may be deco Compassloutside temperaure dise affected by road or engine heat, wind direc- secon play toggles on/off LICO583) tion a ge sang conditions. The display may differ from the actual outside tempera- scene Ou meer spy ggee OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY ture or the temperature displayed on various jetween °F an = oran Pushthe -Â- button for about 1 second when signs or billboards. "ompass zone can be changed to the ignition key is in the ON position to toggle the 8 seconds correct false compass readings a te ten at and ne ace d ra die. e Temperature display will not update unless 5 " & as caibat " us peratur P: Irection qi the vehicle is moving faster than 12 MPH TS ONPEEE TRE CENT POEE play @ on or of. (20 km/h), or the ignition switch has been For information about the automatic anti-glare © To change from °F to °C, push and hold OFF for 4 hours. feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearview the -Â- button for about 8 seconds until mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adijust- the display begins to flash. Press the button ments” section. again to toggle between °F and °C. Once you have selected °F or °C, the display will continue to flash for about 5 seconds, then the temperature will display. Instruments and controls 2-9 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/26/05—tbrooks 1

COMPASS DISPLAY Pushthe -Â- button for about 1 second when the ignition key is in the ON position to toggle the outside temperature and compass direction dis- play @ on or off. The display will indicate the direction of the vehicle's heading. N: North E: East S: South W: West the display reads “CAL', calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at less than 5 MPH (8 km/h). You can also calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your everyday route. The com- pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three complete circles. 2-10 Instruments and controls WICO355) [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

Zone variation change procedure The difference between magnetic north and geo- graphical north is known as variance. In some areas, this difference can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings. Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location if this happens:

1. Press and holdthe -- button for about 8

seconds. The current zone number will ap- pear in the display. Release the button.

2. Find your current location on the zone map.

Refer to the illustration.

3. Pressthe -Ÿ- button repeatedly to toggle

through the zone numbers until the desired number appears in the display. Once you have selected a zone number, the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds. Inaccurate compass direction The compass display is equipped with automatic correction function. If the correct direction is not shown, follow this procedure.

1. With the display turned on, press and hold

the -$-_ button for about 10 seconds. The “CAL' icon in the compass display wil illu- minate.

2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle

in three complete circles at a maximum speed of 5 MPH (8 km/h).

8. After completing the circles, the display

should retum to normal. I the compass deviates from the correct indication soon after repeated adjustment, have the compass checked at an authorized dealer. © The compass may not indicate the correct compass point in tunnels or while driving up or down a steep hill. (The compass returns to the correct compass point when the ve- hicle moves to an area where the geomag- netism is stabilized.) e_ lfamagnetis located in ornear the overhead console in the front of the vehicle or the vehicle is driven where the terrestrial mag- netism is disturbed, the compass display may not indicate the correct direction. À CAUTION e Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc., which are attached to the vehicle by means of a magnet. They affect the op- eration of the compass. + When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as it may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing. Instruments and controls 2-11 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

AUDIBLE REMINDERS ABS * © Anti-lock brake warning light où ue Automatic transmission oil temperature warn- ing light (f so equipped) ATP! Auoraïic transmission park waming light € model) ‘1© Charge warning light (f so equipped) Brake warning light Door open waming light Engine oil pressure warning light (if so equipped) AWD waming light (ESA model) Low fuel waming light Low tire pressure warning light Low windshield washer fluid warning light Seat belt waming light and chime Supplemental air bag warning light Automatic transmission position indicator light CRUISE| Cruise main switch indicator light (if so equipped) SET | Cruise set switch indicator light (if s0 equipped) DIFF | Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) LOCK | system on indicator light (if so equipped) AWD shift indicator light ( ESA model) Front passenger air bag status light High beam indicator light (Blue)

à Hill descent control (HDOC) indicator light (if so equipped) SERVICE) Maltunction indicator light (MIL) SOON 2 Overdrive off indicator light (automatic trans- mission only) Ce) Security indicator light (if so equipped) SLIP | Slip indicator light for models with ABLS (if so equipped) SLIP | Slip indicator light for models with VDC (if so equipped) 4LO | Transier 4LO position inicator light ESA mode) & >) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights DC | Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light (if so [ca] equipped) CHECKING BULBS With all doors closed, apply the parking brake and turn the ignition key to the ON position without starting the engine. The following lights will come on: 2-12 Instruments and controls ÉS,erne or ©, Er, 8, À , a The following lights come on briefly and then go off: ABS or ©, 2° ,SLIP, (1), GA, 410 ,

» OFF If any light fails to come on, it may indicate a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system. Have the system repaired promptly. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie

WARNING LIGHTS ABS © G) Anti-lock brake warning light Ifthe light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the anti-lock brake system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. If an abnormality occurs in the system, the anti- lock function ceases, but the regular braking system continues to operate. If the light comes on while you are driving, contact a NISSAN dealer for repair. The ABS system will be disabled and the ABS light will iluminate when the electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system switch (if so equipped) is turned on and the E-Lock system is engaged. Ifthe E-Lock system disengages or the switch is turned off, the ABS system will be enabled and the ABS light will turn off. AIT | Automatic transmission oil OIL TEMP . s à temperature warning light (if so equipped) This light comes on when the automatic transmis- sion oil temperature is too high. lfthe light comes on while driving, reduce the vehicle speed as soon as safely possible until the light turns off. À CAUTION Continued vehicle operation when the A/T oil temperature warning light is on may damage the automatic transmission. Automatic transmission park ATP warning light (xx model) A WARNING e Ifthe ATP light is ON, this indicates that automatic transmission P (Park) po- sition will not function and the transfer case is in neutral. e When parking, always make sure that the 4WD sl dicator light illuminates and the parking brake is set. Failure to engage the transfer position in 2WD, 4H or 4LO could result in the vehicle mov- ing unexpectedly, resulting in serious personal injury or property damage. e Shift the 4WD switch into the 2WD, 4H or 4LO position again to turn off the ATP warning light when the automatic trans- mission selector lever is in the P posi- tion and the ATP warning light is ON. (Before shifting the 4WD switch into the ALO position, move the automatic transmission selector lever into the N position once, shift the selector lever into P again and make sure the ATP warning light is OFF.) This light indicates that the automatic transmis- sion parking function is not engaged. If the trans- fer control is not secured in any drive position while the automatic transmission selector lever is in the P (Park) position, the transmission will disengage and the drive wheels will not lock.

This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems. BRAKE| Of Brake warning light Parking brake indicator When the ignition key is in the ON position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied. Instruments and controls 2-13 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

Low brake fluid warning light When the ignition key is in the ON position, the light wams of a low brake fluid level. H the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following;

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid

as necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Main- tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the

waming system checked by a NISSAN dealer. A WARNING © Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on. Driv- ing could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driv- ing it could be dangerous. e Pressing the brake pedal with the en- gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping dis- tance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel. 2-14 Instruments and controls e If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked at a NISSAN dealer. Charge warning light (if so equipped) Hthis light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the charging system is not func- tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing, or ifthe light remains on, see a NISSAN dealer immediately. À CAUTION e Do not ground electrical accessories directly to the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable control sys- tem and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. Refer to “Variable voltage control system” in the “Mainte- nance and do-it-yourself” section later in this manual. + Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose, broken or missing. Æ Door open warning light This light comes on when any of the doors are not closed securely while the ignition key is in the ON position.

Engine oil pressure warning light (if so equipped) This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop. The engine oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual À CAUTION Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause se- rious damage to the engine almost imme- diately. Such damage is not covered by warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

AWD warning light ( x model) 4WD The 4WD warning light comes on when the key switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after the engine is started. Hthe engine or vehicle is not functioning properly, the waming light wil either remain iluminated or blink. See “AWD warning light” in the “Starting and driving” section. A CAUTION e If the warning light comes on or blinks during operation, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. e Do not drive on dry hard surface roads in the 4H or 4LO position. If the 4WD ing light turns on when you are g on dry hard surface roads: — in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD. — in the 4LO position for automatic transmission models, stop the ve- hicle and shift the transmission se- lector lever to the N position with the brake pedal depressed and shift the AWD shift switch to 2WD. the 4LO position for manual trans- sion models, stop the vehicle and shift the transmission shift lever to the N position the clutch pedal depressed and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD. e If the warning light is still on after the above operation, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve- nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E (Empty). Low fuel warning light Low tire pressure warning light Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare. The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly. After the ignition switch is tumed ON, this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off. Low tire pressure warning: I the vehicle is being driven with low tire pres- sure, the warning light will iluminate. When the low tire pressure warning light ilumi- nates, you should stop and adjust the tire pres- sure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the light OFF. For additional information, see “Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)" in the “Starting and driving" section and in the “In case of emergency" section. TPMS malfunction: H the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi- mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is tumed ON. The light will remain on after the 1 minute. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see “Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)" in the “Starting and driving" section. Instruments and controls 2-15 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

A WARNING light does not illuminate with the on switch turned ON, have the ve- hicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. e If the light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat. If you have a flat tire, re- place it with a spare tire as soon as possible. 2-16 Instruments and controls

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting. e Replacing tires with those not originally speci by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS. A CAUTION The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular tire pressure check. Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly. e If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the TPMS may not operate correctly. Be sure to install the specified size of tires to the 4 wheels correctly.

Low windshield washer fluid warning light This light comes on when the windshield washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield washer fluid as necessary. See “Window washer fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual Seat belt warning light and chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten your seat belts. The light iluminates whenever the ignition key is turned to the ON or START position and remains illuminated until the driver's seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver's seat belt is securely fastened. The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if the front passenger's seat belt is not fastened when the front passenger's seat is occupied (if so equipped). For 5 seconds after the ignition switch is in the ON position, the system does not activate the warning light for the front passenger. Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system" section for precautions on seat belt usage. Supplemental air bag warning light When the ignition key is in the ON or START position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then tums off. This means the system is operational. I any of the following conditions occur, the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag (if so equipped), curtain side-impact air bags [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

(if so equipped), and pre-tensioner seat belt sys- tems need servicing and your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer: e_ The supplemental air bag warning light re- mains on after approximately 7 seconds. e The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently. e_ The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all. Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre- tensioner seat belts may not function property. For additional details see “Supplemental restraint system" in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual. A WARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light i: could mean that the supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air bag (if so equipped), curtain side-impact air bag systems (if so equipped) and/or pre- tensioner seat belt systems will not oper- ate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. INDICATOR LIGHTS D Automatic transmission position indicator light When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi- tion, this indicator light shows the automatic transmission selector lever position. See “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving" section of this manual. Cruise main switch indicator light (if so equipped) CRUISE The light comes on when the cruise control main switch is pushed. The light goes out when the main switch is pushed again. When the cruise main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise control system is operational. SET Cruise set switch indicator light (if so equipped) The light comes on while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system. Ifthe light blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate the cruise control system is not functioning prop- erly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. DIFF Electronic locking rear LOCK differential (E-Lock) system on indicator light (if so equipped) This light comes on when the electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system clutch is fully engaged. The indicator light flashes when the system is first tumed on. When the system full engages, the light remains on. If the switch is on and the indicator light continues to flash, the system is not engaged. For additional information, see “Electronic lock- ing rear differential (E-Lock) system switch" later in this section and “Electronic locking rear differ- ential (E-Lock) system” in the “Starting and driv- ing” section of this manual. AWD shift indicator light (ea model) The light should turn off within 1 second after turning the ignition switch to ON While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi- cator light will iluminate the position selected by the 4WD shift switch Instruments and controls 2-17 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

The 4WD shift indicator light may blink while shifting from one drive mode to the other. Front passenger air bag status light The front passenger air bag status light ( # ) will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be OFF depending on how the front passenger seat is being used. For front passenger air bag status light operation, see “Front passenger air bag and status light" in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual. O | High beam indicator light (Blue) This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected. The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is activated. PA Hill descent control (HDC) system on indicator light (if so equipped) When the ignition switch is tumed ON, this light comes on briefly and then turns off. 2-18 Instruments and controls The light comes on when the hill descent control system is activated. H the HDC switch is on and the indicator light blinks, the system is not engaged. the indicator light does not come on or blink when the hill descent switch is on, the system may not be functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. For additional information, see “Hill descent con- trol (HDC) switch" later in this section and “Hill descent control (HDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. SERVICE ENGINE SOON Malfunction indicator light (MIL) H this indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction. The malfunction indicator light may also come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank. After a few driving trips, the #8 light should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists. If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys- tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi- ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer information" section of this manual Operation The malfunction indicator light will come on in one of two ways: © Malfunction indicator light on steady — An emission control system malfunction has been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The #E light should turn off after afew driving trips. Ifthe SF light does not tum off after a few diving tips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer. e_ Malfuntion indicator light blinking — An en- gine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To re- duce or avoid emission control system dam- age: [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/14/05—debbie 1

— do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH (72 km/h). — avoid hard acceleration or deceleration. — avoid steep uphill grades. — if possible, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed. The malfunction indicator light may stop blinking and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer. À CAUTION Continued vehicle operation without hav- ing the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission con- trol system. ee Overdrive off indicator light (automatic transmission models only) This light comes on when the overdrive function is OFF. The automatic transmission overdrive function is controlled by the overdrive switch. See “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Le) Security indicator light (if so equipped) This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function indicates the security system equipped on the vehicle is operational. For additional information, see “Security sys- tems” later in this section. SLIP Slip indicator light for models with ABLS (if so equipped) This indicator light comes on if the active brake limited slip is activated. If activated, the system will apply braking to the slipping drive wheel(s), giving the non-slipping wheel(s) more traction. sup | Slip indicator light for models with VDC (if so equipped) This indicator light will blink when the traction control system is limiting wheel spin. Slippery road conditions may exist if the slip indicator blinks on. If this happens, adjust your driving accordingly. The slip indicator light also comes on when you turn the ignition key to the ON position. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light does not come on or does not go off, have the traction control system checked by a NISSAN dealer. If the battery is removed or discharged, the trac- tion control system is disabled and the slip indi- cator light will not turn off after 2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. To reset the system, you must perform the reset procedure. Refer to “Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec- tion of this manual. H the light does not go off after performing the reset procedure, have the traction control system checked by a NISSAN dealer. Transfer 4LO position indicator light (za model) 4LO The light should turn off within 1 second after turning the ignition switch to ON This light comes on when the 4WD shift switch is set in the 4LO position with the ignition key in the ON position. The transfer case may be damaged if you shift the switch while driving. Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. Instruments and controls 2-19 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

The indicator light may blink while shifting from one drive mode to the other. The 4LO indicator light must stop blinking and remain illuminated or turn off before shifting the transmission into gear. If the transmission selec- tor lever is shifted from the N position to any other gear when the 4LO indicator light is blinking, the vehicle may move unexpectedly. When you shift between 4H and 4LO, follow the instructions below: © For automatic transmission models, stop the vehicle and shift the transmission selector lever to the N position with the brake pedal depressed, then depress and turn the AWD shift switch to 4LO or 4H. © For manual transmission models, stop the vehicle and shift the transmission selector lever to the N position with the clutch pedal depressed, then depress and turn the AWD shift switch to 4LO or 4H. You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switch between 4H and 4LO unless you stop the vehicle and shift the transmission selector lever to the N position with the brake pedal (AT models) or clutch pedal (MT models) depressed. 2-20 Instruments and controls er) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated. Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light (if so equipped) This indicator light comes on when the vehicle dynamic control off switch is pushed to OFF, the transfer case is in the 4LO position (ES model), or when the vehicle dynamic control sys- tem is not functioning properly. This indicates the vehicle dynamic control system is not operating, Push the vehicle dynamic control off switch again or restart the engine and the system will operate normally. See “Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. The vehicle dynamic control light also comes on when you turn the ignition key to the ON position The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indicator light while you are driving, have the vehicle dynamic control system checked by a NISSAN dealer. I the battery is removed or discharged, the ve- hicle dynamic control system is disabled and the VDC indicator light will not turn off after 2 sec- onds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. To reset the system, you must perform the reset procedure. Refer to “Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driv- ing” section of this manual. H the light does not go off after performing the reset procedure, have the traction control system checked by a NISSAN dealer. While the vehicle dynamic control system is op- erating, you might feel slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or ac- celerating, but this is normal. The VDC system will be disabled and the VDC light will iluminate when the electronic locking rear differential (E-lock) system switch (if so equipped) is turned on and the E-lock system is engaged. Ifthe E-lock system disengages or the switch is tumed off, the VDC system will be enabled and the VDC light will turn off. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

AUDIBLE REMINDERS Brake pad wear warning The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it makes a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake pedel is depressed. Have the brakes checked as Soon as possible if the warning sound is heard. Key reminder chime A chime sounds if the driver's door is opened while the key is left in the ignition switch. Remove the key and take it with you when leaving the vehicle. Light reminder chime With the ignition switch in the OFF position, a chime sounds when the drivers door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on. Turn the headlight control switch off before leav- ing the vehicle. SECURITY SYSTEMS (if so equipped) LICO359) Your vehicle may have two types of security sys- tems: e Vehicle security system (if so equipped) © NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (if so equipped) VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (if so equipped) The vehicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors when the system is armed. It is not, however, a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs. The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations. AI- ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition, and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and park in secure, wel-lit areas whenever possible. Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identification markers, and tracking systems, are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment. Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features. How to arm the vehicle security system

1. Close all windows. (The system can be

armed even if the windows are open.) Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors

can be locked with the key, power door lock switch (if the door is opened, locked and then closed), or with the keyfob. Instruments and controls 2-21 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

Keyfob operation: Push the {button on the keyfob. All doors lock. The hazard lights flash twice and the horn beeps once to indicate all doors are locked. Whenthe {f} button is pushed with all doors locked, the hazard lights flash twice and the horn beeps once as a re- minder that the doors are already locked The horn may or may not beep. Refer to “Silencing the hom beep feature” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec- tion later in this manual.

4. Confirm that the CÉS> indicator light comes

on. The CÆ#> light stays on for about 80 seconds. The vehicle security system is now pre-armed. After about 30 seconds the ve- hicle security system automatically shifts into the armed phase. The C£# light begins to flash once every 8 seconds. ff, during the 80-second pre-arm time period, the door is unlocked by the key or the keyfob, or the ignition key is turned to ACC or ON, the system will not arm. e_Ifthe keyis turned slowly when locking the door, the system may not arm. Fur- thermore, if the key is turned beyond the vertical position toward the unlock 2-22 Instruments and controls position to remove the key, the system may be disarmed when the key is re- moved. If the indicator light fails to glow for 30 seconds, unlock the door once and lock it again. e Even when the driver and/or passen- gers are in the vehicle, the system will arm with all doors closed and locked with the ignition key in the OFF posi- tion. Vehicle security system activation The vehicle security system will give the following alarm: © The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittentiy. e_ The alarm automatically tums off after ap- proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking a door with the key, or by pressing the button on the keyfob. The alarm is activated by: © opening à door without using the key or keyfob (even ifthe door is unlocked by using the inside lock knob or the power door lock switch). How to stop an activated alarm The alarm stops only by unlocking a door with the key, or by pressing the button on the key- fob.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM (if so equipped) The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered key. I the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following pro- cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position

for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK

position, and wait approximately 10 sec- onds. Repeat steps 1 and 2. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

I the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec- ommends placing the registered key on a sepa- rate key ring to avoid interference from other devices. Statement related to Section 15 of FCC Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys- tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER) This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Oper: is subject to the follow- ing two conditions; (1) This device may not cause harmful in- terference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including inter- ference that may cause undesired opera- tion of the device.

# 2 WICO854| Security indicator light The security indicator light blinks whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function indicates the NISSAN Ve- hicle Immobilizer System is operational. the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilzer System is mal- functioning, the light will remain on while the ignition key is in the ON position. If the light still remains on and/or the en- gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser- vice as soon as possible. Please bring all registered keys that you have when visiting your NISSAN dealer for service. SWITCH OPERATION The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed: @ intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the knob toward @ (Slower) or ®) (Faster). @ Low(LO)— continuous low speed operation © High (HI) — continuous high speed opera- tion Instruments and controls 2-23 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

Push the lever up (4) to have one sweep opera- tion (MIST) of the wiper. Pull the lever toward you (6) to operate the washer. The wiper will also operate several times. A WARNING In freezing temperatures the washer solu- tion may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield. A CAUTION e Do not operate the washer continu- ously for more than 30 seconds. e Do not operate the washer if the reser- voir tank is empty. + Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may the grille if spilled g the window washer reser- 2-24 Instruments and controls + Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturers recom- mended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank. Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concen- trate and water.

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE

MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH (if so equipped) LICO783 To defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and push the rear window defroster switch on. The rear window defroster indicator light on the switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes. ACAUTION When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or dam- age the rear window defroster. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

Lighting @ When turning the switch to the D posi- tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights come on. @ When turning the switch to the #2 posi- tion, the headlights come on and allthe other lights remain on Type B Type C À CAUTION Use the headlights with the engine run- ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. Instruments and controls 2-25 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

LICO561| Autolight system (if so equipped) The autolight system allows the headlights to be set so they turn on and off automatically. The autolight system can: Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights au- tomatically when it is dark. Turn off all the lights when it is light. + Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds after you turn the key to OFF and all doors are closed. 2-26 Instruments and controls To turn on the autolight system:

headlights on and off. Initiall, if the ignition switch is tumed OFF and a door is opened and left open, the headlights remain ON for 5 minutes. If another door is opened during the 5 minutes, then the 5 minute timer is reset. To tu the autolight system off, turn the switch to the OFF, =paz or £0 position. LICO835) Be sure you do not put anything on top of the autolight sensor (®) located in the top side of the instrument panel. The autolight sensor controls the autolight; if it is cov- ered, the autolight sensor reacts a: is dark out and the headlights will illuminate. If this occurs while parked with the engine off and the key in the ON position, your vehicle’s battery could become discharged. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

LICO562| Headlight beam select @ To select the high beam function, push the lever forward. The high beam lights come on andthe 2D light illuminates. @ Pull the lever back to select the low beam. @® Puling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight high beams on and off. Battery saver system I£ the ignition switch is tumed OFF while the headlight switch is in the2DdŒ£ or #2 posi- tion, the headlights will turn off after 5 minutes. Afterthe headlights automatically turn off with the headlight switch in the PE or #2 position, the headlights willilluminate again for 5 minutes if the headlight switch is moved to the OFF position and then turned to the DE or #2 position. À CAUTION Even though the battery saver feature au- tomatically turns off the headlights after a period of time, you should turn the head- light switch to the OFF position when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM

(Canada only) The headlights automatically illuminate at a re- duced intensity when the engine is started with the parking brake released. The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position or in the DZ position. Turn the headlight switch to the #2 position for full illumination when driving at night. the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the daytime running lights do not illumi- nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when the parking brake is released. The daytime run- ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch is tumed off. A WARNING When the daytime running light system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others. Instruments and controls 2-27 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

WICO917 LICO563 LICO393 INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL The instrument brightness control operates when the headlight control switch is in the=DdŒ , #2 or AUTO position (with auto- lights activated) Tu the control (® to adjust the brightness of instrument panel lights when driving at night. 2-28 Instruments and controls

Turn signal @ Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the tum is com- pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically Lane change signal @ To signal a lane change, move the lever up or down to the point where the indicator light begins to flash, but the lever does not latch. FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped) To turn the og lights on, tum the headlight switch to the #2 position, then turn the fog light switchtothe #D position. To tu the fog lights on with the headlight switch in the AUTO position (if so equipped), the head- lights must be on, then turn the fog light switch to the #D position. To tum the og lights off, turn the fog light switch to the OFF position. The headlights must be on and the low beams selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog lights automatically turn off when the high beam headlights are selected. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

LICO394| Push the switch on to wamn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency condi- tions. AI turn signal lights flash. A WARNING e If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road. e Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic. e Turn signals do not work when the haz- ard warning flasher lights are on. The flashers will operate with the ignition switch in any position. Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving. HORN To sound the hom, push the center pad area of the steering wheel A WARNING Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tam- pering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Instruments and controls 2-29 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

HEATED SEAT (if so equipped) LICO616) LICO469) To tu on the cargo lamp, push the switch down to the ON position. ACAUTION Be sure to turn the light switch to the OFF position when you leave the vehicle for extended periods of time, otherwise the battery will go dead. 2-30 Instruments and controls The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters (if so equipped)

1. Start the engine.

2. Pushthe = (low)or æ (high) posi-

tion of the switch, as desired, depending on the temperature. The indicator light in the switch will iluminate. The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on.

8. When the seat is warmed or before you leave

the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off. À CAUTION Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat. Do not put anything on the seat which sulates heat, such as a blanket, cush- n, Seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated. Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater. Any liquid spilled on the heated seat Should be removed immediately with a dry cloth. When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi- lar materials. If any abnormalities are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer. The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

voc ee OFF WICO534 | LIC0743] The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle A WARNING Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv- ing conditions. H the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even ifthe accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off. To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF switch. The indicator will come on Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn ON the system. See “Vehicle dynamic control (VDO) system" in the “Starting and driving” section. e Never rely solely on the ive carefully when using the hill descent control system and decel- erate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal if necessary. Be espe- cially careful when driving on frozen, muddy or extremely steep downhill roads. Failure to control vehicle speed may result in a loss of control of the vehicle and possible serious injury or death. e The hill descent control may not control the vehicle speed on a hill under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to control vehicle speed. Failure to do so may re- n or serious personal À CAUTION descent control system op- uously for a long time, the temperature of the brake pads may in- crease and the hill descent control system may be temporarily disabled (the indicator light will blink). If the indicator light does not come on continuously after blinking, stop using the system. The hill descent control system is designed to reduce driver workload when going down steep hills. The HDC system helps to control vehicle speed so the driver can concentrate on steering the vehicle. To activate the HDC system e the automatic transmission selector lever must be in forward or reverse gear, e_ the AWD switch must be in the 4L position and the vehicle speed must be under 15 mph (25 km/h) or Instruments and controls 2-31 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

e_the 4WD switch must be in the 4H position and the vehicle speed must be under 21 mph (85 km/h), and e_ the HDC system switch must be ON. The HDC indicator light will come on when the system is activated. Also, the stop/tail lights illu- minate while the HDC system applies the brakes to control vehicle speed. If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed while the HDC system is on, the system will stop operating temporarily. As soon as the accelerator or brake pedal is released, the HDC system begins to function again if the HDC operating conditions are fulfilled. The HDC indicator light blinks if the switch is on and all conditions for system activation are not met or if the system becomes disengaged for any reason. To turn off the HDC system, push the switch to the OFF position. For additional information, see “Hill descent con- trol (HDC) system on indicator light” earlier in this section and “Hill descent control (HDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. 2-32 Instruments and controls

ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR

DIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM SWITCH (if so equipped) LOCK LICO729] The Electronic Locking Rear Differential (E-Lock) system can help provide added traction if the vehicle is stuck or becoming stuck. To activate the E-Lock system: e_ the 4WD switch must be inthe 4LO position (a-wheel drive vehicles), e_the vehicle must be stopped or moving at 4 mph (7 km/h) or less, and e_the E-Lock system switch must be tumed

When the E-Lock switch is turned ON, the indi- cator light will flash until the system engages. However, if all operation conditions listed above are not met or the system becomes disengaged, the indicator light will continue to flash. The Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) system is disabled and the ABS light iluminates when the E-Lock system is ON. Also, the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is disabled and the VDC light iluminates when the E-Lock system is ON. See “Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system" in the “Starting and Driving” section for further explanation and system limitations. A WARNING e Never leave the E-Lock system ON when driving on paved or hard-surfaced roads. Turning the vehicle may result in the rear wheels sli ing and result in an accident and personal injury. After us- g the E-Lock system to free the ve- hicle, turn the system OFF. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

+ Use the E-Lock system only when free- ing a stuck vehicle. Try the 4LO position before using the E-Lock system. Never use the E-Lock system on a slippery road surface such as snow or ice sur- face. Using the E-Lock system when driving in these road conditions may cause unexpected movement of the ve- icle during engine braking, accelerat- ing or turning, which may result in an accident and serious personal injury. À CAUTION e After using the E-Lock system, turn the switch OFF to prevent possible damage to driveline components from extended use. e Do not drive over 12 MPH (20 km/h) when the system is engaged. Doing so could result in possible damage to the driveline. e Do not turn on the E-lock system while the tires are spinning. Doing so could damage drivetrain components. CLUTCH INTERLOCK (clutch start) SWITCH (if so equipped) To use the clutch interlock switch

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Depress the brake pedal with your right foot.

8. Place the gear shift lever in the 1 position to

move forward, or R to move backward. CEUTON 4. PI left # he brake pedal and lace your left foot on the brake pedal an START release the parking brake.

5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

6. Press and release the clutch interlock

switch. The CANCEL light on the switch will iluminate. WICOBLT] 7. Turn the ignition to the START position to AWARNING start the engine and, at the same time, de- . : press the accelerator pedal with your right Pay special attention to your surround- foot. As the vehicle begins to move, take ings when using the clutch interlock your left foot off the brake. Once the engine switch. The vehicle will move forward or has started, the clutch interlock switch backward according to the gear selected. CANCEL light shuts off. Do not use the The clutch interlock (clutch start) switch allows interlock switch to start the engine under for starting the engine without depressing the normal driving conditions. clutch pedal. This feature helps you restart the engine if it stops under difficult conditions. (For example, the engine stops on a steep hill and a light movement forward or backward might be dangerous.) Instruments and controls 2-33 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

POWER OUTLET LICO760 Use power outlets with the engine run- ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. «+ Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on. e Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF. e Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature Front row The power outlets are for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones: The bottom power outlet located on instrument panel is powered directly by the vehicle's battery. The top power outlet located on the instrument panel and the power outlet located inside the center console are powered only when the igni- tion key is in the ACC or ON position Open the cap to use a power outlet 2-34 Instruments and controls LICO761 fuse may open. Center console + When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water to contact the À CAUTION outlet. The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use. Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do power outlet for an accessory lighter. See your NISSAN dealer for additional information. Do not use with accessories that ex- ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

STORAGE FUN LICO819 AT model MT model (if so equipped) STORAGE TRAYS LICO764 LICO818 Top center tray A WARNING Do not place sharp objects in the trays to help prevent injury in an accident or sud- den stop. Instruments and controls 2-35 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

LICO823 2-36 MT model (if so equipped) Instruments and controls LICO821 LICO820 2nd row under-seat storage bin 2nd row under-seat storage bin (King cab model) (Crew cab model)

A WARNING e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. e The cargo restrained in the under-seat storage bins must not exceed the weight limits listed below or the bins may not stay secured. In a sudden stop or collision, the unsecured bins could cause personal inury. King cab model: 16 Ib (7.25 kg) Crew cab model Drivers side: 16 Ib (7.25 kg) Passenger's side: 25 Ib (11.33 kg) e If the under-seat storage bins are re- moved for any reason, they should be securely stored to prevent them from causing injury to passengers or damage to the vehicle in case of sudden braking or an accident. e Do not place sharp objects in the under- seat storage bins. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury when the vehicle is m g orifthe vehicle is involved in a collision. To access the under-seat storage bins: For King cab model, lift up the jump seat. Refer to “Jump seat” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section earlier in this manual. O For Crew cab model, lift up the rear bench seat LOCK Refer to “Folding the rear bench seat” in the 4 “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental re- straint system” section earlier in this manual. + unLocK LICO822 To remove the under-seat storage bins:

1. Remove the storage net.

2. Remove the tray by lifting it out of the stor-

To install the under-seat storage bins:

1. Position the under-seat storage bin so the

holes line up with the holes in the floorboard.

2. Insert the knobs and turn them to the LOCK

LICO766) LICO768 WICO673 CONSOLE BOX A WARNING The center console box should not be used while driving so full attention may be Pull up on the lever (D) to open the console box lid 2-38 Instruments and controls GLOVE BOX To open the top portion of the glove box, push the latch @ up and raise the lid. To open the lower portion of the glove box, pull the handle (8) down and lower the lid. Use the master key to lock or unlock the glove box. The valet key cannot be used to lock or unlock the glove box. A WARNING Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop. SUNGLASSES HOLDER (if so equipped) To open the sunglasses holder, push and release. A WARNING e The sunglasses holder should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. e Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to prevent an accident. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

À CAUTION e Do not use for anything other than sunglasses. + Do not leave sunglasses in the sun- glasses holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the sunglasses. WICO824| LICO826 MAP POCKETS King cab model Instruments and controls 2-39 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

LICO825 LICO575) LICO769) 2-40 Crew cab model Instruments and controls SEAT POCKETS (if so equipped) À pocket is located on the back of the drivers seat. À small pocket is also located on the in- board side of the passenger's seat. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

WICO827 Front CUP HOLDERS The front cup holders have adapters that can be removed to accommodate larger cups. A WARNING The cup holder should not be used while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. À CAUTION + Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger. e Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident. WICO771 2nd row (rear of front console) To open the 2nd row cup holders (rear ofthe front console), lower the lid. To close, raise the lid. Instruments and controls 2-41 10/17/05 —debbie 1 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna)

LICO784 WICO828 Bottle holder (front row) À CAUTION e Do not use bottle holder for any other objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident. e Do not use bottle holder for open liquid containers. 2-42 Instruments and controls Bottle holder (2nd row, Crew cab) [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

WICO857 ROOF RACXK (if so equipped) Always evenly distribute the cargo on the tubular roof rack. The maximum total load is 125 Ib (56 kg) evenly distributed. Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR front and rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on the F.M.V.S.S. label (located on the drivers side door jamb pilla). For more information regarding GVWR and GAWR refer to “Vehicle loading information” inthe “Technical and consumer information” sec- tion later in this manual. The front crossbar can be adjusted or removed. Use the Torddriver provided in the tool kit to loosen both crossbar adjusting screws. To adjust

1. Loosen the adjusting screws with the

Torxdriver @ by turning counterclockwise

2. When the clamp is loosened, move the

crossbar so the cargo can be positioned on the crossbar (8).

8. Tighten the crossbar adjusting screws with

the Tondriver by tuming clockwise.

4. Secure the cargo with rope.

5. Always check the tightness of the crossbar

adjusting screws. To remove:

1. Loosen the adjusting screws with the

Torxdriver @ by turning counterclockwise Rotate the clamps ©. Remove the crossbar. Reverse to install. ® 8 © pb Always check the tightness of the crossbar adjusting screws. Instruments and controls 2-43 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

I you hear wind noise coming from the roof rack while driving, adjust the roof rack crossbar to the neutral position, rearward of À on the side rails. A WARNING Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from ing or Shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, un- secured cargo could cause personal injury. À CAUTION Use care when placing or removing items from the roof rack. If you cannot comfort- ably lift the items onto the roof rack from the ground, use a ladder or stool. 2-44 Instruments and controls WINDOWS POWER WINDOWS (if so equipped) A WARNING e Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while i in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows. + Donotleave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- tivate switches or controls and become trapped in a window. Unattended chil- dren could become involved in serious accidents. The power windows operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position, or for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. the driver's or passenger's door is opened during this period of about 45 sec- onds, power to the windows is canceled. LICO785) Window lock button Power door lock switch Front passenger side window switch Right rear passenger window switch (Crew Cab models only)

5. Left rear passenger window switch

(Crew Cab models only)

6. Drivers side automatic switch

Driver's side power window switch FOR The drivers side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close the front and rear passenger windows. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

To open a window, push the switch and hold it down. To close a window, pull the switch and hold it up. To stop the opening or closing function at any time, simply release the switch.

LICO786) LICO787 Front passenger power window switch The passenger window switch operates only the corresponding passenger window. To open the window, push the switch and hold it down @). To close the window, pull the switch up @). Rear power window switch (Crew Cab models only) The rear power window switches open or close only the corresponding passenger window. To open the window, push the switch and hold it down @®). To close the window, push the switch up @ Locking passengers’ windows When the window lock button is depressed, only the driver side window can be opened or closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock function. Instruments and controls 2-45 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

LICO410| WICO263 WICO856) Automatic operation To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation, press the window switch down to the second detent and release it; it need not be held The window automatically opens all the way. To stop the window, lift the switch up while the window is opening. 2-46 Instruments and controls MANUAL WINDOWS The side windows can be opened or closed by turning the hand crank on each door. REAR SLIDING WINDOW (if so equipped) Squeeze the handles of the lever @), then slide the window open [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

SUNROOF (if so equipped) WICO882 AUTOMATIC SUNROOF The sunroof will only operate when the ignition key is in the ON position. The automatic sunroof is operational for about 45 seconds, even if the ignition key is tumed to the ACC or OFF position. I the driver's door or the front passenger's door is opened during this period of about 45 sec- onds, power to the sunroof is canceled. Sliding the sunroof To fully open the sunroof, push the switch toward DOWN/OPEN @) To full close the sunroof, push the switch toward UP/CLOSE @) To open or close the sunroof part way, push the switch in any direction while the sunroof is sliding to stop it in the desired position. Tilting the sunroof Close the sunroof by pushing the switch toward UP/CLOSE (). Release the switch, then push the UP/CLOSE switch again to tilt the sunroof up. To tilt the sunroof down, push the switch toward DOWN/OPEN (1) A WARNING e In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open sunroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints. e Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the sunroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the sunroof is closing. ACAUTION + Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from the sunroof before opening. + Do not place heavy objects on the sun- roof or surrounding area. Auto reverse function (when closing or titing down the sunroof) The auto reverse function can be activated when the sunroof is closed or tilted down by automatic operation when the ignition key is in the ON position or for about 45 seconds afterthe ignition key is turned to the OFF position. Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the sunroof oc- curs. A WARNING There are some small distances immedi- ately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the sunroof. When closing: Ifthe control unit detects something caught in the sunroof as it moves to the front, the sunroof will immediately open backward. When tilting down: Ifthe control unit detects something caught in the sunroof as it tilts down, the sunroof will immedi- ately tit up. Instruments and controls 2-47 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

I the auto reverse function malfunctions and re- peats opening or tikting up the sunroof, keep pushing the tit down switch within 5 seconds after it happens, then the sunroof will fully close gradually. In this case, make sure nothing is caught in the sunroof. A WARNING © In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open sunroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints. Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the sunroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the sunroof is closing. ACAUTION + Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from the sunroof before opening. e Do not place heavy objects on the sun- roof or surrounding area. Sunshade Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for- ward or backward 2-48 Instruments and controls If the sunroof does not close Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the sunroof INTERIOR LIGHTS LICO789 Type A The interior lights have a three-position switch and operate regardless of ignition switch posi- tion. When the switch is in the ON position (), the interior lights illuminate, regardiess of door posi- tion. The lights will go off after about 30 minutes unless the ignition key is in the ACC or ON position. When the switch is in the © position (2), the interior lights will stay on for about 80 seconds when: [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

À CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery. LICO792 LICO630 Type B Type C © The doors are unlocked bythe keyfob,akey © The driver's door is locked by the keyfob, a or the power door lock switch while all doors key, or the power door lock switch. are closed and the ignition switch is in the OFF position e_ The ignition switch is turned ON The lights will turn off automatically after 80 min- utes while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged e_ The drivers door is opened and then closed while the key is removed from the ignition switch When the switch is in the OFF position @), the interior lights do not iluminate, regardless of door position. e_ The key is removed from the ignition switch while all doors are closed. The lights will turn off while the 30 second timer is activated when: Instruments and controls 2-49 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

PERSONAL LIGHTS (if so equipped) MAP LIGHTS (if so equipped) LICO790| LICO791| To tu the personal lights on, press the switches. To turn them off, press the switches again. ACAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time ith the engine stopped. This could result ischarged battery. 2-50 Instruments and controls To turn the map lights on, press the switches. To turn them off, press the switches again. À CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery. HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped) The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device. HomeLink® Universal Transceiver: © Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) devices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and se- curity systems. els powered by your vehicle's battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehi- cle's battery is discharged or is discon- nected, HomeLink® will retain all program- ming. Once the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original trans- mitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver buttons Should be erased for security purposes. For additional information refer to “Program- ming HomeLink®” later in this section. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

A WARNING + Do not use the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and re- verse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards be- came effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 1982). À ga- rage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features in- creases the risk of serious injury or death. e During the programming procedure your garage door or security gate will open and close (if the transmitter is within range). Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door, gate, etc. that you are programming. e Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while programming the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. LICO526) LICO527 PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®

1. To begin, press and hold the two outer

HomeLink® buttons (to clear the memory) until the indicator light @) blinks (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons.

8. Using both hands, simultaneously press and

hold both the HomeLink® button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter but- ton. DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has been completed. Instruments and controls 2-51 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator

light on the HomeLink® flashes, changing from a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashing blink”. This could take up to 90 seconds. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapidly flash- ing light indicates successful programming. To activate the garage door or other pro- grammed device, press and hold the pro- grammed HomeLink® button — releasing when the device begins to activate.

5. Ifthe indicator light on the HomeLink® blinks

rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid, HomeLink® has picked up a “rolling code” garage door opener signal. You will need to proceed with the next steps to train the HomeLink® to complete the programming which may require a ladder and another per- son for convenience.

6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro-

gram button located on the garage door openers motor to activate the “training mode". This button is usually located near the antenna wire that hangs down from the motor. If the wire originates from under a light lens, you will need to remove the lens to access the program button. 2-52 Instruments and controls NOTE: Once you have pressed and released the program button on the garage door open- er's motor and the “tr: ng light” is lit, you have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7. Use the help of a second person for conve- nience to assist when performing this step.

7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas-

ing the garage door opener program button, quickly and firmly press and release the HomeLink® button you've just programmed Press and release the HomeLink® button up to 3 times to complete the training.

8. Your HomeLink® button should now be pro-

grammed. (To program the remaining HomeLink® buttons for additional door or gate openers, follow steps 2-8 only.) NOTE: Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to “clear” all previously programmed HomeLink® buttons. If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR

CANADIAN CUSTOMERS Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand- held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec- onds. To program your hand-held transmitter to HomeLink®, continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button (note steps 2 - 4 under “Pro- gramming HomeLink®”) while you press and re- press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every 2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly (indicating successful programming). NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, etc. it is advised to unplug the device dur- g the “cycling” process to prevent pos- sible damage to the garage door opener components.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK®

UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (once pro- grammed) may now be used to activate the ga- rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap- propriate programmed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button. The red indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE- DIAGNOSIS Hthe HomeLink® does not quickly learn the hand- held transmitter information: «replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries. © position the hand-held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink® surface. press and hold both the HomeLink® and hand-held transmitter buttons without inter- ruption. © position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink® is not programmed within that time, try holding the transmitter in another position — keeping the indicator light in view at all times. you continue to have programming difficulties, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department, The phone numbers are located in the Foreword of this manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED

INFORMATION Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However, to clear all programming, press and hold the two outside buttons and release when the indicator light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE

HOMELINK® BUTTON To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button, complete the following.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® but-

ton. Do not release the button until step 4 has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flash

slowly (after 20 seconds), position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the HomeLink® surface.

8. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter

slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly, release both buttons. The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink® button that was just programmed,. This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink® buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

I your vehicle is stolen, you should change the codes of any non-roling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink®. Consul the Owner's Manual of each device or call the manu- facturer or dealer of those devices for additional information. When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the HomeLink® Univer- sal Transceiver with your new transmitter information. FCC Notice: This device complies with FCC rules part

15. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference and (2) This de- vice must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This transmitter has been tested and com- plies wi FCC and DOC/MDC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly ap- proved by the party responsible for compli- ance could void the user's authority to op- erate the equipment.

MEMO 2-54 Instruments and controls

1. Two master keys (black) with transpon-

der chip (if so equipped) and chrome NISSAN brand symbol on one side

2. Valet key (black) with transponder chip

4... Transponder chip (if so equipped) À key number plate is supplied with your keys. Recordthe key number and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. lf you lose your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate: 8-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer can duplicate it

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM KEYS (if so equipped) You can only drive your vehicle using the master or valet keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilzer System components in your vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in the key head The master key can be used for al the locks. The valet key cannot be used for the glove box lock. To protect belongings when you leave a key with someone, give them the valet key only. Never leave these keys in the vehicle. Additional or replacement keys: If you still have a key, the key number is not necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle Immobilier System keys. Your dealer can dupli- cate your existing key. As many as five NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be- cause the registration process will erase the memory of all key codes previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. Afterthe registration process, these components will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration. Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time of registration will no longer be able to start your vehicle. Do not allow the immobilier system key, which contains an electrical transponder, to come into contact with salt water. This could affect system function. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

DOORS A WARNING e Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally open- ing the doors, and help keep out intruders. e Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehii They could unknowingly ac- tivate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in seri- ous accidents. \ en = WPDO311 LPDO240| Drivers side Power (if so equipped)

The power door lock system allows you to lock or Manual unlock all doors at the same time. To lock a door, turn the key toward the front ofthe vehicle ®. To unlock, turn the key toward the rear Turning the key toward the front (D of the vehicle locks all doors. Turning the key one time toward the rear (2 ofthe vehicle unlocks that door. From that position, returning the key to neutral @ (where the key can only be removed and inserted) and turning it toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors @). Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

KNOB To lock the door without the key, move the inside lock knob to the lock position (1), then close the door. To unlock the door without the key, move the inside lock knob to the unlock position (2) 8-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Door lock switch

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR

LOCK SWITCH (if so equipped) To lock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver's or front passenger's side) to the lock position @). When locking the door this way, be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle. To unlock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver's or front passenger's side) to the unlock position (2). Lockout protection When the power door lock switch (driver's or front passenger's side) is moved to the lock position with the key in the ignition and any door open, all doors will lock and unlock automatically. This helps to prevent the keys from being acci- dentiy locked inside the vehicle. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

REAR DOORS (King Cab models) 2. From the outside, pull the door handle () 3. Open the door to the desired position. toward you.

1. Open the driver's or passenger's door.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

(Crew Cab models only) Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle. The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors. When the lever is in the lock position, the door can be opened only from the outside. 3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

(if so equipped) H is possible to lock/uniock all doors, turn the interior lights on, and activate the panic alarm by using the keyfob from outside the vehicle. Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle before locking the doors. The keyfob can operate at a distance of approxi- mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effective distance depends on the conditions around the vehicle. As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSAN dealer. The keyfob will not function when: e_ the battery is discharged e the distance between the vehicle and the keyfob is over 33 ft (10 m) The panic alarm will not activate when the key is in the ignition switch. À CAUTION Listed below are conditions or occur- rences which will damage the keyfob: + Do not allow the keyfob to become wet. e Do not drop the keyfob. e Do not strike the keyfob sharply against another object. e Do not place the keyfob for an extended period in an area where temperatures ‘exceed 140°F (60°C). If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec- ommends erasing the ID code of that key- fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un- authorized use to unlock the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing proce- dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

ENTRY SYSTEM Locking doors

1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch

8. Close the hood and all doors.

. Pushthe {f} button on the keyfob. All the doors lock. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the hom beeps once to indicate all doors are locked. e Whenthe {À button is pushed with all doors locked, the hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once as a reminder that the doors are already locked. eH a door is open and you push the {À button, the doors will lock but the horn will not beep and the hazard lights will not flash. The horn may or may not beep. Refer to “Silenc- PA F ing the hom beep feature” later in this section for details. | LPDO210| Unlocking doors Pushthe {button on the keyfob once. Only the drivers door unlocks. © The hazard warning lights flash once if all doors are completely closed with the ignition key in any position except the ON position. e_ The interior lights illuminate for 30 seconds when the interior light switch is in the normal operation position. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

Pushthe button on the keyfob again within 5 seconds. © All doors unlock. e_ The hazard warning lights flash once if all doors are completely closed. The interior lights can be turned off without wait- ing 30 seconds by inserting the key into the ignition and turning to the ON or START position, locking the doors with the keyfob or pushing the interior light switch to the OFF position. Auto relock Whenthe {À button on the keyfob is pushed, all doors will lock automatically within 1 minute unless one of the following operations is per- formed: e_ Any door is opened e _Akeyis inserted into the ignition switch and the key is turned from OFF to ON. 3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPDO211| LPDO262 Using the panic alarm If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pushing and holding the 1 button on the keyfob for longer than 0.5 second. The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25 seconds. The panic alarm stops when: e_ithas run for 25 seconds, or © any button is pushed on the keyfob. Silencing the horn beep feature If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti- vated using the keyfob. To deactivate: Press and hold the {À and buttons for at least 2 seconds. The hazard warning lights will flash three times to confirm that the horn beep feature has been deactivated. To activate: Press and hold the {À and buttons for at least 2 seconds once more. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

The hazard warning lights will flash once and the horn will sound once to confirm that the hom beep feature has been reactivated. Deactivating the hom beep feature does not si- lence the horn if the alarm is triggered. Using the interior lights Pushthe button on the keyfob once totum on the interior lights. For additional information, refer to “Interior lights” in the “Instruments and controls” section earlier in this manual. HOOD LPDO302 @ Pull the hood lock release handle located below the driver side instrument panel. The hood will spring up slightly. @ Push the lever at the front of the hood to the side as illustrated with your fingertips and raise the hood. © Insert the support rod into the slot on the underside of the hood. When closing the hood, lower it slowly and make sure it locks into place. A WARNING e Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Fail- ure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident. e If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid do not open the hood. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

FUEL-FILLER DOOR LPDO263)| LPDO325| FUEL-FILLER CAP The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard. 3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Loop the tether strap around the hook (© while refueling A WARNING e Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain condi- tions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and do not Smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling. Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the cap a third of a turn, and wait for any “hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuel from spraying out and possibly causing personal injury. Then remove the cap. Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel Spray and possibly a fire. Use only an original equipment type fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emis- sion control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It could also cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on. Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle. Do not fill a portable fuel contain: the vehicle or trailer. Static electi can cause an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or ler. To reduce the risk of serious jury or death when filling portable fuel containers:

— Always place the container on the ground when filling. — Do not use electronic devices when filling. — Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are fill- ingit. — Use only approved portable fuel con- tainers for flammable liquid. ACAUTION If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage. e Tighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly may cause the RÈKE mal- function indicator light qu) to illumi- nate. If the ÉNÈNE light illuminates be- cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The NE light should turn off after a SOON few driving trips. If the ÉÈRE light does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. formation, see the “Malfunction indicator light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and Controls” section earlier in this manual. STEERING WHEEL LPDO304] TILT OPERATION (if so equipped) Pullthe lock lever forward and hold it to adjust the steering wheel up or down to the desired posi- tion. Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheel in place. A WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

WPD0315| @ To block glare from the front, swing down the main sun visor. @ To block glare from the side, remove the main sun visor from the center mount and swing the visor to the side. 3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments @ Slide the extension sun visor in or out as needed À CAUTION + Do notstore the sun visor before return- ing the extension to its original position. + Do not pull the extension sun visor forc- edly downward. WPD0307| VANITY MIRRORS To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the mirror cover is open. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

MIRRORS WPD0126| WPD0333| REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped) The night position (D) reduces glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you at night. Use the day position (2) when driving in daylight hours. A WARNING Use the night position only when neces- sary, because it reduces rear view clarity. AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped) The inside mirror is designed so that it automati- cally dims according to the intensity of the head- lights of the vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare feature operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The indicator light (D will illuminate when the automatic anti-glare feature is operating. To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press the © button. The indicator light will turn off. To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature, press the O button again. The indicator light will turn on. For information on HomeLink® Universal Trans- ceiver operation, see “HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in the “Instrument and controls" sec- tion of this manual. For information on the compass and outside tem- perature display, see “Compass and outside temperature display" in the “Instrument and con- trols” section of this manual. NOTE: Do not hang any objects over the sensors © or apply glass cleaner to the sensors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors, resulting in improper operation. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

OUTSIDE MIRRORS A WARNING + Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects. Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. You could lose control of your vehi and cause an accident. 3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments LPDO237|

WPD0170| Electric control type (if so equipped) The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Move the small switch ® to select the right or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position using the large switch (®. Manual control type The outside mirror can be moved in any direction for a better rear view. Heated mirrors (if so equipped) Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi- tional information, see “Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch" in the “Instrument and controls” section of this manual. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

TRUCK BOX LPDO259| LPDO270| Foldable outside mirrors Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it. TAILGATE Opening the tailgate Pull the taïlgate handle upward and lower the tailgate. The support cables hold the tailgate open. When closing the tailgate, make sure the latches are securely locked. Do not drive the vehicle with the tailgate down, unless equipped with NISSAN’s Bed Extender (accessory) or equivalent in the extended position. For proper truck box loading see “Vehicle loading information” in the “Technical and consumer in- formation” section of this manual. A WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a Cargo area ide a vehicle. In a colli- sion, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. + Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

2. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle.

3. Pullthe tailgate out from the right side hinge.

4. Slide the tailgate out of the left side hinge.

Installing the tailgate

1. Insert the tailgate into the left side hinge.

2. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle and

insert into the right side hinge:

8. Continue to hold the tailgate at a 45 degree

angle and attach the tailgate support cables.

4. Close the tailgate securely

LPDO271 Removing the tailgate

1. Release the tailgate support cables.

A CAUTION e The tailgate is heavy. Two people should remove or instal Be careful not to drop it during removal. e After releasing the support cables, do not let the tailgate rest on the bumper. 3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments LPDO272 Locking the tailgate To lock the tailgate, turn the key toward the pas- senger side of the vehicle ®. To unlock, turn the key toward the driver side (2). Both the master key and the valet key can be used to lock and unlock the tailgate. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

LTI0102 TIE DOWN HOOKS (if so equipped) For your convenience, tie down hooks are placed at each corner of the truck box. These may be used to help secure cargo loaded into the truck box. «The weight ofthe cargo load must be evenly distributed over both the front and the rear axes. e_ All cargo should be securely fastened with ropes or straps to prevent it from shifting or sliding within the vehicle. A WARNING + Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or Shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

MEMO 3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

VENTILATORS LHA0534] Adjust air flow direction for the driver's and pas- senger's side windows(D, driver and passen- ge @, or center(@) ventilators by moving the ventilator slide and/or ventilator assemblies. 4-2 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(manual) A WARNING e The air conditioner cooling function op- erates only when the engine is running. e Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets Should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. + Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up. e Positioning of the heater and/or air conditioner controls should not be done while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

CONTROLS Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and controls fan speed. Aïr flow control dial The air flow control dial allows you to select the air flow outlets. MAX — Airflows from center and side AIC vents with maximum cooling (air conditioning). 74 — Airflows from center and side ventilators. — Air flows from center and side ventilators and the front and rear floor outlets. “1 — Airflows mainly from the front and rear floor outlets.

% — Airflows from defroster outlets and the front and rear floor outlets. 7 — Air flows mainly from defroster outlets. The air flow control dial also has intermediate positions which allow the air flow to be distrib- uted between 2 of the icon positions on the air flow control dial Temperature control dial The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the temperature, tum the dial to the left. To increase the temperature, turn the dial to the right. ON position: Push the air recirculation button &> to recir- culate air inside the vehicle. The indicator light on the button will come on. Push the®> button to the on position: © when driving on a dusty road. Air recirculation button © to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas- senger compartment. © for maximum cooling when using the air con- ditioner. Heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-3 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

OFF position: Push the air recirculation buttons/&> again to tum air recirculation off. The indicator light on the SE) button will turn off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment and distributed through the selected outlet. Use the off position for normal heater or air con- ditioner operation. A/C | Air conditioner button (if so equipped) The button is provided only on vehicles equipped with an air conditioner. Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the desired (1 - 4) position and push the À/C button to turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light comes on when the air conditioner is oper- ating. To turn off the air conditioner, push the a/C button again. The air conditioner cooling function oper- ates only when the engine is running. Rear window defroster switch For more information about the rear window de- froster switch, see “Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch" in the “instruments and controls" section of this manual 4-4 Heater, air con HEATER OPERATION Heating This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost outlets.

1. Push the&> button to the OFF position

for normal heating. The indicator light on theSS button will go off.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the 45

4. Tum the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position between the middle and the hot position. Ventilation This mode directs outside air to the side and center ventilators.

1. Push the&> button to the OFF position.

The indicator light on the} button will go off.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the Z#

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position. Defrosting or defogging This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to defrost/defog the windows.

1. Turn the air flow control dial to the ÿ

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position between the middle and the hot position. © To quickly remove ice or fog from the win- dows, turn the fan control dial to 4 and the temperature control lever to the full HOT. position. e Whenthe ff position is selected, the air conditioner automatically turns on (however, the indicator light will not illuminate) if the outside temperature is more than 36°F (2°C). The air conditioning system will con- tinue to operate until the fan control dial is turned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off, even if the air flow control dial is tumed to a position other than the ff position. This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield. The&7 mode automatically [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance. Bi-level heating This mode directs cooler air from the side and center vents and warmer air from the floor outlets. When the temperature control dial is moved to the full hot or full cool position, the air between the vents and the floor outlets is the same tem- perature.

1. Push the) button to the off position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the #74

4. Tum the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position. Heating and defogging This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind- shield

1. Tu the air flow control dial to the #

8. Tum the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position between the middle and the hot position. © Whenthe % position is selected, the air conditioner automatically turns on (however, the indicator light on the A/C button will not come on) if the outside temperature is more than 86°F (2°C). If in defrost mode for more than one minute, the air conditioning system will continue to operate until the fan control dial is turned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off, even if the air flow control dial is turned to a position other than the # position. This dehumidifies the _air which helps defog the windshield. The mode automatically tums off, allowing out- side air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defog- ging performance. Operating tips Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and air inlet in front of the windshield. This improves heater operation. Heater, air conditioner and audio systems AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION (if so equipped) Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the desired (1 - 4) position, and push in the a/C button to activate the air conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions are added to the heater operation The air conditioner cooling function oper- ates only when the engine is running. Cooling This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.

1. Push theÆ> button to the off position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the 2À

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position. © For quick cooling when the outside tem- perature is high, push the button to the on position (indicator light on). Be sure to return the <&Y button to the off position for normal cooling. 4-5 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

Dehumidified heating This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air

1. Push the button to the off position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the #7

5. Tum the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position. Dehumidified defogging This mode is used to defog the windows and dehumidify the air.

1. Tum the air flow control dial to the 7

comes on. 4-6 Heater, air con Whenthe GP , # or positions in between are selected, the air conditioner automatically turns on (however, the indicator light will not illuminate) if the outside temperature is more than 86°F (2°C). The air conditioning system will con- tinue to operate until the fan control dial is tumed 10 OFF orthe vehicle is shut off, even ifthe air flow control dial is tumed to a position other than the G7 position. This dehumidifies the_air which helps defog the windshield. The&> mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.

4. Tum the temperature control dial to the de-

sired position. Operating tips e Keep the windows and sunroof (if so equipped) closed while the air conditioner is in operation. © After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3 minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger compartment. Then, close the windows. This allows the air con- ditioner to cool the interior more quickly. joner and audio systems e The air conditi g system should be operated for approximately 10 minutes at least once a month. This helps pre- vent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication. e If the engine coolant temperature ÿgauge indicates engine coolant tem- perature over the normal range, turn the air conditioner off. See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.

The following charts show the button and dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating, cooling or defrosting. For additional information on heating and cooling see “Heater and air con- ditioner” in this section”. The air recirculation (SS> ) button should always be in the OFF position for heating and defrosting. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

HEATING hester core Air flow Fan control is control dial Temperature dial control dial Air passed through Air conditioner Air recirculation button button AC Air flow | Temp | Fan | section Button | controi | control |control | "ecjreulati or din) + | or LHAO531 HEATING & DEFROSTING/ DEFOGGING hester core Fan control Temperature Air flow dial control dial control dial | E

COOLING Fan control Air flow control Temperature control dial dial dial

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve- hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s ozone layer. Special charging equipment and lubricant is re- quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi- tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations” in the “Techni- cal and consumer information” section of this manual. ANISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ mentally friendly" air conditioning system. A WARNING The air conditioner system contains re- frigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner ser- vice should be done only by an experi enced technician with proper equipment. Heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-9 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

AUDIO SYSTEM RADIO Tu the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and press the PWR (power)/VOL (volume) knob to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, the key should be turned to the ACC position. Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, build- ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ- ences. intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences. Using a cellular phone in or near the ve- hicle may influence ra reception quality. Radio reception Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra- dio reception. These circuits are designed to extend reception range, and to enhance the qual- ity of that reception. However there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even when the finest equipment is used. These char- acteristics are completely normal in a given re- ception area, and do not indicate any malfunction in your NISSAN radio system Reception conditions will constantly change be- cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain, signal distance and interference from other ve- hicles can work against ideal reception. De- scribed below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception.

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 — 30 miles (40 — 48 km), with monaural (single chan- nel) FM having slightly more range than stereo FM. External influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is Within 25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same characteristics as light. For example they will reflect off objects. Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade and/or drift. Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to antenna position (usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter) static or flutter can be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the treble control to reduce treble response. 4-10 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signal, direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time. The signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo- mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM signals, because of their low frequency, can bend around objects and skip along the ground. In addition, the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of these characteristics, AM signals are also sub- ject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver. Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings. It can also oceur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist. Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights. SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so equipped) When the satellite radio is first installed or the battery has been replaced, the satellite radio may not work properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

the vehicle outside of any metal or large building for satellite radio to receive all of the necessary data. No satellite radio reception is available and “NO SAT" is displayed when the SAT band option is selected unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an XM® or SIRIUS"" satellite radio service subscription is active. Sat- elite radio can only be installed in vehicles that were factory pre-wired for satellite radio. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaï and Guam. Satellite radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio signal. If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite antenna. disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc or packaging. DIGITAL AUDIO e During cold weather or rainy days, the player may malfunction due to the hu- midity. If this occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely. e The player may skip while driving on rough roads. e The CD player sometimes cannot func- tion when the compartment tempera- ture is extremely high or low. Decrease/increase the temperature before use. e Do not expose the CD to direct sun- light. e CDs that are in poor con dirty, scratched or covered with finger- prints may not work properly. LHA009| The following CDs may not work prop- AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS erly: e Copy control compact discs (CCCD) Compact disc (CD) player e Onlyuse high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm) : u round discs that have the “COMPACT + Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) e Recordable compact discs (CD-R) Heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-11 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

e Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunc- tion: © 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter e CDs that are not round e CDs with a paper label e CDs that are warped, scratched, or have abnormal edges e This audio system can only play pre- recorded CDs. It has no capability to record or burn CDs. e Ifthe CD cannot be played, one of the following messages will be displayed. CHECK DISC: + Confirm that the CD is inserted cor- rectly (the label side is facing up, etc.). © Confirm that the CD is not bent or warped and it is free of scratches. PUSH EJECT: This is an error due to excessive tem- perature inside the player. Remove the CD by pushing the EJECT button. After a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal. UNPLAYABLE: The file is unplayable in this audio sys- tem (only MP3 CD). Compact Disc with MP3 Terms: e_MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Experts Group Audio Layer 8. MP3 is the most wel-known compressed digital audio file format. This format allows for near “CD quality" sound, but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP compression removes the redundant and irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the human ear doesn't hear. e Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music file. The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file. 4-12 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems _ Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital (A/D conversion) per second. e_ID3 tag — The ID3 tag is the part of the encoded MP3 file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title, artist, album title, encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed on the Album/Artist/Track title line on the display. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

RoOT FOLDER ES ro © ws WHA0543 Playback order: Playback order of the CD with compressed files (MP3) is as illustrated above. e_ The names of folders not containing MP3 files are not shown in the display. © _lfthere is a file in the top level of the disc, “ROOT"is displayed. e_ The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order. Heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-13 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

Specification chart: Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW Supported file systems 1509660 LEVEL1, IS09660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * 509660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported. Version

MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Supported versions” MP3 Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz Bitrate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR Tag information 1D8 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only) Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 Text character number limitation 81 characters Displayable character codes 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: {UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian) “Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played. 4-14 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

Troubleshooting guidi Symptom Cause and Countermeasure Check if the disc was inserted correctiy. Check if the disc is scratched or dirty. Cannot play Check if there is condensation inside the player. f there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player. there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it retums to the normal temperature Files with extensions other than “MPS", “mp3 or “wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications. Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty. Bit rate may be too low. It takes a relatively long time before the music starts playing. Hthere are many folders or file levels on the MP disc, or i it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing. Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc, might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data. Moves immediately to the next song when playing When a non-MP3 file has been given an extension of “MP3" or “mp3”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song. Songs do not play back in the desired order The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order. Heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-15 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie +

1 2 3 DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped) PWR/VOL control knob Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position, then push the PWR/VOL control knob. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, reel |] LS 7 co turn the key to the ACC position. The mode (radio BE. Ft ÉL 1 or CD) that was playing immediately before the 11 ET & n ? system was turned off resumes playing. æ ( 5 When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on. == __ Pushing the PWR/VOL control knob again turms Fm FR 6 the system off. SEEK 10 Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to the right to A LY 7 increase volume or to the left to decrease volume. WHAO586 SR ompRoN PRESET ABC button 7... AUDIO button Display 8. Station select buttons CD button 9. SEEK/TRACK button CD eject button 10. PWR/VOL control knob CD insert slot 11. BAND select button MENU button

y © D 4 BAG E BASS ---> TREB --> FAD --> BAL LHAO118 Adjusting tone quality and speaker balance To adjust the audio levels for bass, treble, fader, and balance, push the AUDIO button and adjust the level with the SEEK/TRACK button. Press the AUDIO button once for BASS (bass), twice for TREB (treble), 3 times for FAD (fader) and 4 times for BAL (balance). Once the audio level is set the display will retum back to radio or CD display mode after 7 seconds or the AUDIO button can be pressed again within 7 seconds to set the next audio level. Pressing the AUDIO button a fifth time will return the display back to radio or CD display mode. Fader adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers, balance adjusts the sound level between the right and left speakers. Clock set

1. Press and hold the MENU button until it

beeps (longer than 2 seconds).

2. The hours will start flashing. Press

SEEK/TRACK (A or) to adjust the hours.

3. Press the MENU button until the radio beeps

to switch to the minute adjustment.

4. The minutes will start flashing. Press

SEEK/TRACK (A or X ) to adjust the min- utes.

5. Press the MENU button again to exit the

clock set mode. The display will return to the regular clock display after 7 seconds, or you may press the MENU button again to return to the regular clock display. FM-AM radio operation FM-AM band select Push the aamo button to change from AM to FM reception The FM stereo indicator, ST, illuminates during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception. X || V |SEEK/manual/SCAN tuning When the MENU button is pushed while the radio is playing, tuning mode is cycled between: SEEK tuning — manual tuning — SCAN mode *TUNE” and “SCAN” are shown in the display for each mode. No icon is displayed for SEEK mode. A WARNING The radio should not be tuned while driv- ing so full attention may be given to ve- hicle operation. SEEK tuning Push the SEEK/TRACK tuning button (A or À ) for less than 1.5 seconds. SEEK tuning begins from low to high frequencies or high to low frequencies, depending on which button is Heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-17 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

pressed, and stops at the next broadcasting sta- tion. If using the À button, once the highest broadcasting station is reached, the radio contin- ues in the SEEK mode at the lowest broadcasting station. If using the M button, once the lowest broadcasting station is reached, the radio contin- ues in the SEEK mode at the highest broadcast- ing station. Manual tuning Use the N7 and ZX buttons for manual tuning. To move quickly through the channels, hold either of the tuning buttons down. SCAN tuning Push and hold the SEEK/TRACK tuning button ( or X ) for more than 1.5 seconds. SCAN illuminates in the display window, and the radio station blinks. SCAN tuning begins from low to high frequencies or high to low frequen- cies, depending on which button is pressed. SCAN tuning stops at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. When scanning, SCAN is solid and the radio station blinks. When temporarily stopped on a station, SCAN blinks and the sta- tion display is solid. Pushing the button again during this 5 second period stops SCAN tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station. (O) SELECT

© MEMORIZE (ojoje] © CONFIRM Bin Le PUSH and HOLD button for longer than 1.5 seconds Channel indicator will ‘come on and the sound resumes when memorizing is complete LHAO119) Station memory operations Each preset mode (A, B or C) has 6 presets, capable of storing any combination of AM and FM stations. 4-18 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems Press the PRESET ABC button to change be- tween the presets: A—B—C The radio displays icon A, B or C to indicate which set of presets is active. To store a radio station in a preset:

1. Select the desired preset by pressing PRE-

2. Tune to the desired station.

3. Press the desired station select button for

more than 3 seconds. For example, in the illustrations, ch2 is to be memorized. The radio mutes when the select button is pushed.

4. When the indicator illuminates in the display

and the sound resumes, memorizing is com- plete.

5. Other station select buttons can be set in

the same manner. Ithe battery cable is disconnected, or ifthe radio fuse opens, the radio memory is canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

Compact disc (CD) player operation Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position, and carefullÿ insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side up. The compact disc is auto- matically pulled into the slot and starts to play. H the radio is already operating, it automatically turns off and the compact disc begins to play. À CAUTION Do not force a compact disc into the CD insert slot. This could damage the CD and/or CD changer/player. co | CD button When the CD button is pushed with a compact disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turns off and the compact disc starts to play. Track up/down, FF/REV À Y (rewind) buttons Track up/down When the À button is pushed and released while the compact disc is playing, the selection following the present one starts to play from the beginning. Push the À button several times to skip several selections. Each time the button is pushed, the CD advances 1 additional selection. The number appears in the display window. (When the last selection on the compact disc is skipped, the first selection is played.) When the X button is pushed and released, the selection being played returns to the beginning Push the button several times to skip back several selections. Each time the button is pushed, the CD moves back 1 selection. Hthe play pattem is in MIX mode when the À or M. button is pushed the next selection will be chosen at random. FF (Fast Fonward)/REV (Reverse) When the À or button is pushed and held while the compact disc is playing, the compact disc plays at an increased speed while fast for- warding or rewinding. When the button is re- leased, the compact disc returns to normal play speed. MENU) MENU When the MENU button is pushed while the com- pact disc is playing, the play pattern changes as follows: RPT: The current selection is repeated. MIX: Selections are played at random, not fol- lowing the sequence on the compact disc. The same program may be repeated twice. If the À button is pushed in the MIX mode, selections will be chosen at random. Blank (no symbol): All selections are played repeatedly in sequence. When a new compact disc is inserted, the play pattern automatically changes to ALL. Æ | CDEJECT button When the Æ button is pushed with a com- pact disc loaded, the compact disc ejects. Whenthe Æ buttonis pushed while the com- pact disc is playing, the compact disc ejects and the system turns off. P4 DISC indicator light This light 7 comes on when a compact disc is loaded into the player. Heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-19 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

“No satellite radio reception is available when the RADIO button is pressed to access satellite radio stations unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an XM® or SIRIUS"" satellite radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio can only be in- Stalled in vehicles that were factory pre- 10 12 wired for satellite radio. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaiïi and Guam.

FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH

COMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER

No satellite radio reception is available when the RADIO button is pressed to access satellite radio LHaosas|… Ststions unless optional satellite receiver and an- tenna are installed and an XM® or SIRIUS"" sat-

1. PRESET ABC button 7... SCAN RPT ellite radio service subscription is active. Satellite

2. Display screen 8. DISP button radio can only be installed in vehicles that were

3. CLOCK button 9. CAT FOLDER factory pre-wired for satellite radio. Satellite radio

Audio main operation POWER/VOLUME control: Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then push the POWER/VOLUME control knob while the system is off to call up the mode (radio or CD) which was playing immediately before the system was turned off. To tum the system off, POWER/VOLUME control knob. Turn the POWER/VOLUME control knob to ad- just the volume. press the This vehicle may be equipped with speed sensi- tive control volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volume changes as the driving speed changes. AUDIO knob (BASS, MIDRANGE, TREBLE, FADE, BALANCE and SSV if so equipped): Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode as follows:

BASS —+ MID — TREBLE — FADE — BALANCE

— SSV (if so equipped) To adjust Bass, Mid (Midrange), Treble, Fade and Balance, press the AUDIO knob until the desired mode appears in the display. Turn the Tuning knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. You can also use the Tuning knob to adjust Fader and Balance modes. Fader adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers. To change the SSV mode to OFF, LOW, MID or HIGH, turn the Tuning knob to the right or left. Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatediy until the radio or CD display reappears. Other- wise, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear after about 10 seconds. Clock set

1. Press the CLOCK button until it beeps

2. The hours will start flashing. Press CAT

FOLDER( Æ or )or SEEK TRACK (HE or BB ) to adjust the hours.

3. Press the CLOCK button again to switch to

the minute adjustment.

4. Press CAT FOLDER ( Æ or or

SEEK-TRACK (4 or BB ) to adjust the minutes.

5. Press the CLOCK button again to exit the

clock set mode The display will return to the regular clock display after 7 seconds, or you may press the CLOCK button again to return to the regular clock display. DISP (display) button: This DISP (display) button will show text about MP3, SAT or CD information in the audio display. CD display mode To change the text displayed while playing a CD with text press the DISP button. The DISP button will allow you to scroll through CD text as follows: Disc title «— Track title. To change the default display mode press the AUDIO knob repeatedly until DISPLAY MODE appears on the display, then rotate the knob to selectthe following display modes: Disc title «— Track title «— Track number. Once the display mode is selected press the AUDIO knob again to store the setting. If the AUDIO knob is not pressed within 8 seconds the display will refresh with the last selected display mode setting. e_ Track title mode displays the title of the se- lected CD track. e_ Disk title mode displays the title of the CD being played. © Track number mode displays the number selected disc and the track that is currently being played on the disk Heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-21 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

MP3 display mode To change the text displayed when listening to an MP3 with MP3 text (when CD with text is being used), press the DISP button. The DISP button will scroll through the CD text as follows: Disc title «— Track title «— Folder title. To change the default display mode press the AUDIO knob repeatedly until DISPLAY MODE appears on the display, then rotate the knob to select the following display modes: Folder num- ber — Track title —— Folder title — Disc title «— Disc number. Once a display mode is selected press the AU- DIO knob again to store the setting. Folder number mode displays the folder number and the file number of the folder currently being played. «Disc number mode displays the number se- lected disc and the track that is currently being played. e_ Tracktitle mode displays the ID8 track title of the MP3 file. e_ Disc title mode displays the ID3 disc title of the MP3 file. e_ Folder title mode displays the folder name given to the MP3 folder. Display satellite radio display mode (if so ‘equipped) To change the text displayed when listening to satellite radio (if so equipped) press the DISP button. The DISP button will scroll through the broadcasted information as follows: Name «— Title «— Current display mode. To change the default display mode push the tune knob to display mode and rotate the knob to select the following display modes: Channel number +— Channel name +—— Name +— Title. Once the display mode is selected press the tune knob again to store the setting. If the tuning knob is not pressed after 8 seconds the display will refresh with the last selected display mode setting. © Channel number mode displays the channel number of the selected satellite radio sta- tion. © Channel name mode displays the channel name of the selected satellite radio station. Name mode displays the name of the artist, host or weather condition of the selected satellite radio station. © Title mode displays the song title, show name, or temperature of the selected satel- lite radio station. 4-22 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems FM/AM/SAT radio operation FM/AM/SAT band select: Pushing the RADIO button will change the band as follows: AM — FM or SAT (Satellite, if so equipped) When the RADIO button is pushed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will come on at the station last played. The last station played will also come on when the POWER/VOLUME control knob is de- pressed to ON. No satellite radio reception is available when the RADIO button is pressed to access satellite radio stations unless optional satellite receiver and an- tenna are installed and an XM® or SIRIUS"" sat- elle radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio can only be installed in vehicles that were factory pre-wired for satellite radio. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaï and Guam. If satellite radio is not operational then the RADIO button is used to toggle between AM and FM bands. If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO button is pushed, the compact disc will automati- cally be turned off and the last radio station played will come on. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception. « D CAT FOLDER (Tuning): A WARNING The radio should not be tuned while driv- ing so full attention may be given to ve- hicle operation. To manually tune the radio, push the CAT FOLDER tune button ( Æ or D) or turn the tuning knob to right or left. To move quickly through the channels, hold either the Æ or D button down for more than

Push the SEEK/TRACK button (or BI ) for less than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to low or low to high frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station. SEEK tuning: To seek quickly through the channels, press and hold the SEEK/TRACK button for more than 1.5 seconds. When the button is released the radio will seek to the next broadcasting station. SCAN RPT tuning: Push the SCAN RPT button for more than 1.5 seconds to stop at each broadcasting station (AM, FM or SAT if so equipped) for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again during this 5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN RPT button is not pushed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next station. PRESET A-B-C (Station memory opera- tions): 18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT (Satellite-if so equipped) radio to the A, B and C preset button in any combination of FM, AM or SAT stations.

2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT station

8. Tune to the desired station using manual,

SEEXK or SCAN tuning. Push and hold any of the desired station memory buttons (1 — 6) until a beep sound is heard.

4. The channel indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Memorizing is now complete.

5. Other buttons can be set in the same man-

ner. Ifthe battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations. Radio data system (RDS): RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data information service transmitted by some radio stations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur- rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but many stations are now considering broadcasting RDS data. RDS can display: © Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”. e_ Station name, such as “The Groove” H the station broadcasts RDS information, the RDS icon is displayed Compact disc (CD) changer operation À CAUTION e Do not force a compact disc into the CD insert slot. This could damage the CD and/or CD changer/player. Heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-23 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

e Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed could damage the CD and/or CD changer. Tum the ignition key to the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up. The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start play- ing. To insertthe disc, first push the LOAD button. If the radio is already operating, it will automati- cally turn off and the compact disc will play. the system has been tumed off while the com- pact disc was playing, pushing the POWER/VOLUME control knob will start the compact disc. Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discs in the CD changer. LOAD button: To insert a CD in the CD changer, push the load button @ for less than 1.5 seconds. Select the loading slot by pushing the CD insert select button (1 — 6), then insert the CD. To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, push the load button for more than 1.5 seconds. The slot numbers (1 — 6) will iluminate on the display when CDs are loaded into the changer. CD button: When the CD button is pushed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play. When the CD button is pushed with the compact disc loaded with the radio playing, the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play.

When the BI button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while à compact disc is playing, the track being played returns to its beginning. Push several times to skip back through tracks. The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pushed. SEEK/TRACK: When the BI button is pushed for less than 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing, the next track will start to play from its beginning Push several times to skip through tracks. The compact disc will advance the number of times: the button is pushed. (When the last track on the compact disc is skipped through, the first track will be played.) When the orBBl button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds while a CD is playing, the CD plays at an increased speed while fast for- warding or rewinding through the existing track 4-24 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems being played. When the button is released the CD returns to normal play speed. « > CAT FOLDER: While playing an MP3, push the CAT FOLDER button ( Æ or ) to scan backward or forward through available folders. CD select buttons: To play another CD that has been loaded, push a CD select button (1 — 6). SCAN/RPT: When the SCAN/RPT play button is pushed while the compact disc is played, the play pattern can be changed as follows ALL DISC RPT — 1 DISC RPT— 1 TRACK RPT — ALL DISC RDM — 1 DISC RDM — ALL DISC RPT ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated. 1 DISC RPT: The disc thatis currently playing will be repeated. 1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playing will be repeated ALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will be played randomly 1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur- rently playing will be played randomly [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

[A] CD EJECT: Current disc: e_ Press the slot number (1 — 6) for the desired disc, then pressthe Æ button. The com- pact disc will be ejected. If the disc is not removed within 15 seconds, the disc will reload. All discs: e Press and hold the Æ button for more than 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will be ejected one by one. f a disc is not removed within 15 seconds, or the Æ button is pressed again during the eject sequence, the entire disc eject sequence will be can- celed. When this button is pushed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will eject and the last source will be played. CDIN indicator: The slot numbers (1 — 6) will illuminate if CDs have been loaded into the changer in CD mode only. LHA0049)

CD CARE AND CLEANING

e_ Handie a CD by its edges. Do not bend the disc. Never touch the surface of the disc. © Always place the discs in the storage case when they are not being used. © To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion. © Do not use a conventional record cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use. Heater, air conditioner and audio systems e_ A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges. Remove the rough edges by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated. 4-25 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

AUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped) The audio system can be operated using the controls on the steering wheel. POWER on/off switch With the ignition key tumed to the ACC or ON position, push the POWER switch to turn the audio system on or off “MODE” select switch Push the mode select switch to change the modes:

PRESET À — PRESET B — PRESET C — CD—

PRESET À Volume control switch Push the volume control switch up or down to increase or decrease the volume. VIA Memory change (radio): Push the tuning switch( V7 or ZX )forless than 1.5 seconds to change presets. Tuning Seek tuning (radio): Push the tuning switch ( VW or ZX ) for more than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previ- ous radio station. Next/Previous track (CD): Push the tuning switch NV or ZX forless than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning ofthe present track or skip to the next track. Push several times to skip back or skip through tracks. 4-26 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems Change disc (CD) (if so equipped): Push the tuning switch V7 or 2 for more than 1.5 seconds to change the playing disc up or down. ANTENNA The antenna cannot be shortened, but can be removed. When you need to remove the antenna, turn the antenna rod counterclockwise. To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna clock- wise. Tighten the antenna rod to specification using a suitable tool such as an open-end wrench. The antenna rod tightening specification is 8.4 — 3.6 N:m (30 — 32 in-lb). Do not use pliers to tighten the antenna as they can leave marks on the antenna surface. The antenna rod cannot be hand tightened to the proper specification. A CAUTION Always properly tighten the antenna rod during instal jon or the antenna rod may break during vehicle operation. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following cautions, otherwise the new equipment may ad- versely affect the engine control system and other electronic parts. A WARNING e A cellular telephone should not be used while driving so full attention may be en to vehicle operation. Some juris- ions prohibit the use of cellular tele- phones while driving. e If you must make a call while your ve- hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu- lar phone operational mode (if so equipped) is highly recommended. Ex- ercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. e If a conversation in a moving vehicle requires you to take notes, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so.

À CAUTION Keep the antenna as far away as pos- sible from the electronic control modules. Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the electronic con- trol system harnesses. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness. Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer. Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body. For details, consult a NISSAN dealer. Do not ground electrical accessories directly to the battery terminal. Doing so, will bypass the variable voltage con- trol system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. Refer to “Vari- able voltage control system” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec- tion later in this manual. Use electrical accessories with the en- gine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. Heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-27 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

MEMO 4-28 Heater, air conditioner and audio systems

5 Starting and driving Precautions when starting and driving.… Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) Three-way catalyst. . Tire pressure monitoring eystem (TPMS) On-pavement and off-road driving precautions . . . Avoiding collision and rollover. …:!!!.! Drinking alcohol/drugs and drving ie Driving safety precautions Ignition switch. . …. Automatic transmission: Manual transmission Key positions Nissan vehicle immobilizer or system Before starting the engine . . Starting the engine Driving the vehicle …. Automatic transmission: Manual transmission . Parking brake Cruise control (f so equipped).. Precautions on cruise control . Cruise control operations Break-in schedule . Increasing fuel economy. EX Using four wheel drive (AWD). Transfer case shifting procedures Electronic locking rear differential € Lock) system if so equipped) Parking/parking on hils. Power steering Brake system . Brake precautions . Anti-lock brake system (ABS). Active brake limited slip (ABLS) system if so equipped) .… rressee..5-80 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system (if so equipped) 5-80 Hill descent control (HDC) system G s0 9 equipe. .5-82 Hill start assist (HSA) system (if so squipped) Cold weather driving Freeing a frozen door lock . Anti-freeze.............. Battery... Draining of coolant water : Tire equipment . . Special winter equipment. . Driving on snow or ice . Engine block heater (if so equipped). [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

AND DRIVING A WARNING e Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals. e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col- lision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) A WARNING e Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger- ous. lt can cause unconsciousness or death. 5-2 Starting and driving e If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all dows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately. + Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage. + Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time. e Keep the lift gate and rear windows closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passen- ger compartment. If you must drive with the lift gate or rear windows open, fol- low these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the © air recirculation but-

ton (if so equipped) to off and the fan control dial to 4 (high) to circulate the ail e If electrical wiring or other cable con- nections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the lift gate or the body, follow the manufacturer's recommen- dation to prevent carbon monoxide en- try into the vehicle. © The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qua d mechanic whenever: a. The vehicle is raised for service. b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartiment. c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system. d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, un- derbody, or rear of the vehicle. THREE-WAY CATALYST The three-way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst are bumed at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants. A WARNING e The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys- tem are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

e Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire. ACAUTION e Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously re- duce the three-way catalyst’s abi help reduce exhaust pollutants. e Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc- tion: ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv- ing if the engine misfires, or if notice- able loss of performance or other un- usual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly by a NISSAN dealer. e Avoid dri with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst. e Do not race the engine while warmi up. e Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.

SYSTEM (TPMS) Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and in- flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (I your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi- cantly underinflated tire causes the tire to over- heat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger ilumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal- function indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi- mately one minute and then remain continuously iluminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal- function exists. When the malfunction indicator is iluminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may oceur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alter- nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac- ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. Addi e_ The TPMS does not monitor the tire pres- sure of the spare tire. nal information: Starting and dri [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

© The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving). e_ Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle's operation and the outside temperature. Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illumi- nate. If the warning light illuminates in low ambient temperature, check the tire pres- sure for all four tires. «You can also check the pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on the display screen. The order of the tire pressure figures dis- played on the screen does not correspond With the actual order of the tire position. See “Tire pressure information" in the “Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems” section. For additional information, see “Low tire pressure warning light” in the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)" in the “In case of emergency" section. 5-4 Starting and driving

A WARNING If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehi as soon as possible. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pres- sure shown on the Tire and Loa Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace ith a spare tire as soon as possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section for changing a flat til When a spare js mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting. Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS. e Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol re sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors. ACAUTION Do not place metalized film or any metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not function properly. FCC Notice: Changes or modifications not expressly ap- proved by the party responsible for compli- ance could void the user's authority to op- erate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interface, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired op- eration of the device. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie +

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD

DRIVING PRECAUTIONS Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. They have higher ground clearance than passen- ger cars to make them capable of performing in a variety of on-pavement and off-road applications. This gives them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars. An advantage of higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. However, they are not designed for comering at the same speeds as conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to per- form satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Be sure to read the driving safety precautions later in this section.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND

ROLLOVER A WARNING Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident. Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed comering, or sudden steering ma- neuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with any vehicle, loss of control could result in a coll n with other vehicles or objects, or cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre- scription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so. Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions: and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING A WARNING Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re- duces coordination, delays reai and impairs judgement. Dri drinking alcohol of being involved in an accident inj g yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury. NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohot-related accidents. Al- though the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol. Remember, drinking and driving don't mix! And that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre- Scription, and illegal drugs). Don't drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco- hol, drugs, or some other physical condition. Starting and dri [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep wa- ter or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for leisure use, unlike a conventional off-road ve- hicle. Remember that two-wheel drive models are less capable than four-wheel drive models for rough road driving and extrication when stuck in deep snow or mud, or the like. Please observe the following precautions: A WARNING e Drive carefully when off the road and avoid dangerous areas. Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should be seated with their seat belt fastened. This will keep you and your passengers in position when driving over rough terrain. e Do not drive across steep slopes. In- stead drive either straight up or straight down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can tip over sideways much more easily than they can forward or backward. 5-6 Starting and driving

Many hills are too steep for any vehicle. If you drive up them, you may stall. If you drive down them, you may not be able to control your speed. If you drive across them, you may roll over. Do not shift gears while driving on downhill grades as this could cause loss of control of the vehicle. Stay alert when driving to the top of a hill. At the top there could be a drop-off or other hazard that could cause an accident. If your engine stalls or you cannot make it to the top of a steep hill, never at- tempt to turn around. Your vehicle could tip or roll over. Always back Straight down in R (Reverse) gear. Never back down in N (Neutral) or with the clutch depressed (manual transmission vehicles), using only the brake, as this could cause loss of control. Heavy braking going down a hill could cause your brakes to overheat and fade, resulting in loss of control and an acci- dent. Apply brakes lightly and use a low gear to control your speed. Use the Hill Descent Control feature (if so equipped). e Unsecured cargo can be thrown around when driving over rough terrain. Prop- erly secure all cargo so it will not be thrown forward and cause injury to you or your passengers. e To avoid raising the center of gravity excessively, do not exceed the rated capacity of the roof rack (if so equipped) and evenly distribute the load. Secure heavy loads in the cargo area as far forward and as low as pos- sible. Do not equip the vehicle with tires larger than specified in this manual. This could cause your vehicle to roll over. e Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering wheel when driving off-road. The steering wheel could move sud- denly and injure your hands. Instead drive with your fingers and thumbs on the outside of the rim. e Before operating the vehicle, ensure that the driver and all passengers have their seat belts fastened. e Always drive with the floor mats in place as the floor may become hot. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

e Lower your speed when encountering strong crosswinds. With a higher center of gravity, your NISSAN is more af- fected by strong side winds. Slower speeds ensure better vehicle control. e Do not drive beyond the performance capablity of the tires, even with 4WD engaged. e Accelerating quickly, sharp steering maneuvers or sudden braking may cause loss of control. e If at all possible, avoid sharp turning maneuvers, particularly at high speeds. Your NISSAN four-wheel drive vehicle has a higher center of gravity than a two-wheel drive vehicle. The vehicle is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two-wheel drive vehicles. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly could result in loss of control and/or a rollover accident. e Always use tires of the same type, size, brand, construction (bias, bias-belted, or radial), and tread pattern on all four wheels. Install chains on the rear wheels when driving on slippery roads and drive carefully. + Be sure to check the brakes immedi- ately after driving in mud or water. See “Brake system” later in this section for “Wet brakes”. e Avoid parking your vehicle on steep hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it rolls forward, backward or sideways, you could be injured. e Whenever you drive off-road through sand, mud or water as deep as the wheel hub, more frequent maintenance may be required. See “Periodic mainte- nance” in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide.” IGNITION SWITCH WSD0041| AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION The ignition lock is designed so the key cannot be turned to the LOCK position and removed until the shift selector lever is moved to the P (Park) position. When removing the key from the ignition, make sure the shift selector lever is in the P (Park) position. If the selector lever is not returned to P (Park) position, the key cannot be moved to the LOCK position. Starting and driving 5-7 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

To remove the key from the ignition switch:

1. Shift the selector lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion with the key in the ON position:

2. Tum the key to the LOCK position.

3. Remove the key from the ignition.

If the selector lever is shifted to the P (Park) position after the key is tumed to the OFF posi- tion or when the key cannot be turned to the LOCK position, proceed as follows to remove the key.

1. Move the shift selector lever into the P (Park)

2. Tum the ignition key slightly toward the ON

3. Turn the key to the LOCK position.

The shift selector lever is designed so it cannot moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition key is tumed to OFF position or if the key is removed from the switch. The shift selector lever can be moved if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed. 5-8 Starting and driving There is an OFF position between the LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF position is indicated by a “1” on the key cyli When the ignition is in the OFF po: the steering wheel is not locked. In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be tumed about 1/8 of a tum clockwise from the straight up position. To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to the LOCK position. Remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steer- ing wheel slightly right and left. If the key will not turn from the LOCK posi- tion, turn the steering wheel to the left or right while turning the key to unlock the key cylinder. A WARNING Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK position while driving. The steering wheel will lock. This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury. WSD0052| MANUAL TRANSMISSION The ignition switch includes a device that helps prevent accidental removal of the key while driv- ing. The key can only be removed when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position: On manual transmission models, to turn the igni- tion key to LOCK position from ACC or ON position, tum the key to OFF, pushthe key in, then turn the key to LOCK. In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be tumed about 1/8 of a turn clockwise from the straight up position: [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to the LOCK position. Remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steer- ing wheel slightly right and left. A WARNING Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK driving. The steering wheel may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury. KEY POSITIONS LOCK: Normal parking position (0) OFF: (Not used) (1) ACC: (Accessories) (2) This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running. ON: Normal operating position (3) This position turns on the ignition system and the electrical accessories. START: (4) This position starts the engine. As soon as the engine has started, release the key. lt automati- cally returns to the ON position.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System wil not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key. I the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following pro- cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position

for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Tum the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK

position, and wait approximately 10 sec- onds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key. I the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec- ommends placing the registered key on a sepa- rate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

e Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear. e_ Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool- ant, brake fluid, and window washer fluid as frequently as possible, or at least whenever you refuel © Check that all windows and lights are clean. © Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation. © Lock all doors. © Position seat and adjust head restraints. © Adjust inside and outside mirrors. e_ Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise. © Check the operation of warning lights when the key is turned to the ON (3) position. See “Waming/indicator lights and audible re- minders” in the “Instruments and controls" section of this manual. Starting and dri [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Automatic transmission:

Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended. The shift selector lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the key is turned to the OFF position or the key is removed from the ignition switch. The starter is designed not to operate if the shift selector lever is in any of the Manual transmission: Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). Depress the clutch pedal to the floor while cranking the engine. The starter is designed not to operate unless the clutch pedal is fully de- pressed.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off the

accelerator pedal by turning the ignition key to START. Release the key when the engine start. Ifthe engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure: 5-10 Starting and dr © If the engine is very hard to start in ex- tremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap- proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it and then crank the engine. Release the key and the accelerator pedal when the engine starts. the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. After cranking the engine, release the accel- erator pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turn- ing the ignition key to START. Release the key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure. À CAUTION Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, turn the key off and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged.

4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 80 sec-

onds after starting. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION A WARNING e Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu- tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 3, 2 or 1. Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident. Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up. Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse) while the vehicle is moving. This could cause an accident. À CAUTION e When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by de- pressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose. e Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control. The automatic transmission in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and smooth operation. The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the following pages. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment. Starting the vehicle

1. After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal before attempting to move the shift selector lever out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and

move the shift selector lever into a driving gear.

8. Release the foot brake, then gradually start

the vehicle in motion: The automatic transmission is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any drive position while the ignition switch is in the ON position. The shift selector lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition key is turned to the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the key is removed. E CE |

A WARNING Apply the parking brake if the selector lever is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage. Ifthe key is turned to the OFF or ACC position for any reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), or any D (Drive) position, the key cannot be tumed to the LOCK position and be removed from the ignition switch. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) position, then the key can be turned to LOCK. P (Park): Use this selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake pedal must be depressed to move the se- lector lever from N (Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first, then move the shift selector lever into the P (Park) position. 5-12 Starting and dr R (Reverse): À CAUTION Use this position only when the vehicle is completely stopped. Use this position to back up. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal must be depressed to move the selector lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to R (Reverse). N (Neutral): Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving. D (Drive): Use this position for all normal forward driving, 3 (Third gear): Use this position for driving up and down long slopes where engine braking would be advanta- geous. Do not downshift into the 3 position at speeds over the following and do not exceed the follow- ing speed in the 3 position. 2WD and AUTO: 62 MPH (100 km/h)

62 MPH (100 km/h) 4LO: 31 MPH (50 km/h) 2 (Second gear): Use this position for hill climbing or engine brak- ing on downhill grades. Do not downshift into the 2 position at speeds over the following and do not exceed the follow- ing speeds in the 2 position. 2WD and AUTO: 71 MPH (115 km/h)

62 MPH (100 km/h) 4LO: 31 MPH (50 km/h) 1 (Low gear): Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or slow driving through deep snow, sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

Do not downshift into the 1 position at speeds over the following and do not exceed the follow- ing speeds in the 1 position. 2WD and AUTO: 43 MPH (70 km/h) 4H: 43 MPH (70 km/h) 4LO: 31 MPH (50 km/h) LSDO141| Shift lock release Ifthe battery is discharged, the shift selector lever may not be moved from the P (Park) position even with the brake pedal depressed. To move the shift selector lever, release the shift lock. The shift selector lever can be moved to N (Neutral). However, the steering wheel will be locked unless the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. This allows the vehicle to be moved ifthe battery is discharged. To push the shift lock release, complete the fol- lowing procedure:

1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock release cover as

4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lock

release slot and push down.

6. Turn the key to the ON position to unlock the

steering wheel. Now the vehicle may be moved to the desired location. Hthe shift selector lever cannot be moved out of P (Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the auto- matic transmission system as soon as possible. A WARNING If the selector lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunction- ing stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others. Starting and driving 5-13 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

Accelerator downshift — in D position — For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel- erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis- sion down into a lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed. 5-14 Starting and dr LSD0142| Overdrive switch Each time your vehicle is started, the transmis- sion is automatically “reset” to overdrive ON. ON: With the engine running and the shift selector lever in the D (Drive) position, the transmission upshifts into Overdrive as vehicle speed increases. Overdrive does not engage until the engine has reached operating temperature. OFF: For driving up and down long slopes where engine braking is nec- essary push the Overdrive switch once. The O/D OFF indicator light in the instrument panel comes on at this time. When cruising at a low speed or climbing a gentle slope, you may feel uncomfortable shift shocks as the transmission shifts into and out of Overdrive repeatedly. In this case, depress the Overdrive switch to turn the Overdrive off. The O/D OFF indicator light in the instrument panel comes on at this time. When driving conditions change, depress the Overdrive switch to turn the Overdrive on. Remember not to drive at high speeds for ex- tended periods of time with the Overdrive off. This reduces fuel economy. MANUAL TRANSMISSION A WARNING e Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control. e Do not over-rev the engine when shift- ing to a lower gear. This may cause a loss of control or engine damage. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

À CAUTION Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This may cause clutch damage. Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting to help prevent transmission damage. Stop your vehicle completely before shifting into R (Reverse). When the vehicle is stopped with the engine running (for example, at a stop light), shift to N (Neutral) and release the clutch pedal with the foot brake applied.

f 4 5 WSD0154 LSDO148 5-speed 6 - speed Shifting To change gears, or when upshifting or down- shifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift into the appropriate gear, then release the clutch slowly and smoothly. To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever. If the clutch pedal is not fully depressed before the transmission is shifted, à gear noise may be heard. Transmission damage could occur. Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 8rd, Ath, 5th and 6th gear in sequence according to vehicle speed To back up depress the shift lever and then move it to the R (Reverse) position after stopping the vehicle completely. On the 5-speed manual transmission model, you cannot shift directly from the 5th gear into R (Reverse). First shift into N (Neutral), then in to R (Reverse) after stopping the vehicle completely. I it is difficult to move the shift lever into R (Reverse) or 1 (First), shift into N (Neutral), then release the clutch pedal. Fully depress the clutch pedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (First). If your vehicle is equipped with 4-wheel drive, see “Transfer case shifing procedures” later in this section. Starting and driving 5-15 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

Suggested upshift speeds The following are suggested vehicle speeds for shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance. Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road conditions, the weather and individual driving habits. © For QR25DE two-wheel drive models: GEAR CHANGE MPH (km/h) 1st to 2nd 11(7) 2nd to 8rd 15 (24) Srd to 4th 24 (88) Ath to 5th 35 (56) For VO4ODE two-wheel drive models and four-wheel drive models (2H and 4H posi- tion): GEAR CHANGE MPH (km/h) 1st to 2nd 11(7) 2nd to 8rd 17 (27) Srd to 4th 25 (40) Ath to 5th 32 (51) Sth to 6th* 45 (72) 5-16 Starting and driving e_4-wheel drive model (4L position): GEAR CHANGE MPH (km/h) 1st to 2nd 8(13) 2nd to 3rd 12(19) Srd to 4th 20 (82) Ath to Sth 22 (85) Sth to Gth* - *6 Speed available on VO4ODE models only. Suggested maximum speed in each gear Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate. Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the highest gear suggested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits, and drive according to the road conditions, which will en- sure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control. Allowable maximum speed in each gear: 2-wheel drive models GEAR 1st 2nd 8rd Ath Sth 4-wheel drive models 2H/4H position GEAR 1st 2nd 8rd Sith 6th AL position GEAR 1st 2nd 8rd Ath Sth 6th MPH (km/h) 34 (65) 59 (95) 90 (146) MPH (km/h) 33 (64) 58 (93) 84 (135) MPH (km/h) 12 (20) 22 (85) 32(51) 43 (70) 55 (89) [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

PARKING BRAKE A WARNING e Be sure the parking brake is fully re- leased before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident. e Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle. e Do not use the gear shift in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged. + Do not leave children unattended vehicle. They could release the parking brake and cause an accident. LSD0150| To engage: Pull the lever up @) To release:

8. While puling up on the parking brake lever

slightly, push the button and lower com- pletely ®).

4. Before driving, be sure the brake waming

light goes out. Starting and driving 5-17 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

CONTROL e_lfthe cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically. The SET indicator light in the instrument panel then blinks to wam the driver. Bon e_lfthe SET indicator light blinks, tum the cruise control main switch off and have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. 5-18 Starting and dr e_ The SET indicator light may blink when the cruise control main switch is turned ON while pushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch (located on the steering wheel). To properly set the cruise control system, use the following pro- cedures. A WARNING Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions: e When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed. © In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed. e On winding or hilly roads. © On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.). © In very windy areas. Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident. À CAUTION On manual transmission models, do not shift into N (Neutral) without depressing the clutch pedal when the cruise control is set. Should this occur, depress the clutch pedal and turn the main switch off imme- diately. Failure to do so may cause engine damage.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed be- tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. To turn on the cruise control, push the main switch. The CRUISE indicator light in the instru- ment panel comes on. To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. The SET indicator light in the instrument panel comes on. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set speed. e_ To pass another vehicle, depress the ac- celerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the cruise control To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following three methods. © Pushthe CANCEL button; the SET indicator light in the instrument panel goes out. © Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator light goes out. Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator light in the instrument panel go out. The cruise control is automatically canceled and the SET light in the instrument panel goes out if: e_ you depress the brake or clutch pedal while pushing the ACCEL/RES or COAST/SET switch. The preset speed is deleted from memory. © the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH (13 km/h) below the set speed. © _ you depress the clutch pedal (manual trans- mission), or move the shift selector lever to N (Neutral) (automatic transmission). To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods. © Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the COAST/SET switch. Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you de- sire, release the switch. © Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch Each time you do this, the set speed in- creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods. © _Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve- hicle attains the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. e_ Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re- lease the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed. © Push and release the COAST/SET switch Each time you do this, the set speed de- creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). To resume the preset speed, push and re- lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re- tumns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h). BREAK-IN SCHEDULE A CAUTION During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and en- sure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in short- ened engine life and reduced engine performance. © Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the engine over 4,000 rpm. © Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear. © Avoid quick starts. © Avoid hard braking as much as possible. Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. Starting and driving 5-19 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

e_Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position. e_ Drive at moderate speeds on the highway. Driv- ing at high speed lowers fuel economy. e Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a safe distance behind other vehicles. Use a proper gear range which suits road conditions. On level roads, shift into high gear as soon as possible. e_Avoid unnecessary engine idling, Keep your engine tuned up. «Follow the recommended periodic mainte- nance schedule. e Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres- sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy. Keep the front wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy. «Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy. Use the air conditioner only when necessary. When cruising at highway speeds, it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag. e ÆÆ Use 4H or 4L position only when necessary. Four-wheel drive operation low- ers fuel economy. 5-20 Starting and dr

EZ1 USING FOUR WHEEL DRIVE

(4WD) À CAUTION + Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4L0 position on dry hard surface roads. Driv- ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4L0 may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear and increased fuel consumption. If the 4WD warning light turns on when you are driving on dry hard surface roads: — in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD. — in the 4LO position for automatic transmission vehicles, stop the ve- hicle and shift the transmission se- lector to the N position with the brake pedal depressed and shift the AWD shift switch to 2WD. in the 4L0 position for manual trans- mission vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift the transmission shift lever to the N position with the clutch pedal depressed and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD. e Ifthe warning light is still on after the above operation, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

TRANSFER CASE SHIFTING

PROCEDURES The part time 4WD system provides 3 positions (2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can select the desired drive mode according to the driving con- ditions. 2WD or 4WD shift procedure: [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

wo sn Wa! Indicator Light suichéton | Omer [aWDsnt | ranser 410 Use Conditions Au1D Shi Procedure position 2 Move the AWD switch. Rear wheels eo For déng on dy, paved roads (Economy | 2WD <—> 4H k drive) or state dynamometer UM testing | AWD shi indicator ight wil indicate transfer shift position engaged. For drving on rock, sandy or snow \ #hes En cord mate Neutral Neutral disengages the automatic trans- | 1. Stop the vehicle. will allow the vehicle to ro. Do not cave he brake pedal depressed - he transfer shift position in NeutraL"2 For manual transmission vehicles: Shift the transmission shift lover ta the (N) position with the 7 May bink cltch depressod.

8. For automatic transmission vehicles: Depress and tum the AWD shift switch to 4LO or 4H

& with the brake pedal depresscd. 40 For manual transmission vehicles: Depress and turn the WD switch to 4LO or 4H with the ltch pedal depressedl Awhecls For use when maïmum power and trac- | THE TRANSFER CASE DOES NOT ENGAGE BETWEEN 4H AND 4LO (OR 4LO TO 4H) UN- os ion is required (for example: on steep | LESS YOU HAVE FIRST STOPPED THE VEHIGLE, DEPRESSED THE BRAKE PEDAL AND lluminated | grades or rock, sandy, muddy roads) | MOVED THE TRANSMISSION SELECTOR TO NEUTRAL FOR AUTOMATIG TRANSMISSION VEHICLES. FOR MANUAL TRANSMISSION VEHIGLES YOU MUST MOVE THE TRANSMIS-

SION SHIFT LEVER TO NEUTRAL. 3

“1: Before moving the transmission selector or shift lever from neutral, wait until the 4LO indicator light stays on steady. This indicates that the 4WD shif procedure is completed and the transfer gear is correctly set in the 4LO position. the vehicle is shifted into gear before the indicator is on steady, the transfer gear may grind, not engage correct or stay in the noutral position. = IFthe AWD warning light iluminates, perform the following procedure to return the transfer case to comect operating condition.

1. Turn off the engine by tuming the ignition switch "OFF.

- Check that the AWD waming light turns off. I the AWD waming light iluminates, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. 8. Apply the parking brake, for automatic transmission vehicles, depress the brake pedal and move the transmission selector to Neutral position. For manual transmission vehicles, move the transmission shit lever to Neutral position. 4. With the brake pedal depressed on automatic transmission vehicles or with the clutch pedal depressed on manual transmission vehicles, move the AWD shit switch to desired mode. - Be sure to wait until the transfer gear change completes before shifing the transmission selector ar transmission shift lever fram Neutral position. :2; Wie changing in and oui of 4LO, the igntion key must be ON and ihe vehicle engine must be running for a shit t take place and for te idicatr ighis (AWD shit and 4LO posiionindcator) to be operable Oïherwise, the sh system" later in his section. wél not take place and ne indicator lights wall be on or flashing, 8: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turms on when you shift the 4WD sh switch to 4LO. The voc Starting and driving 5-21 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1 indicator ight (f so equipped) will also tu on when 4LO is selected. See “Vehicle dynamic control

The transfer case AWD shift switch is used to select either 2WD or 4WD depending on the driving conditions. There are three types of drive modes available, 2WD, 4H and 4LO. The 4WD shift switch electronically controls the transfer case operation. Rotate the switch to move between each mode, 2WD, 4H and 4LO. To change into or out of 4LO, the vehicle MUST be stationary, shift the transmission selector or transmission shift lever to Neu- tral (N), and for automatic transmission vehicles depress the brake pedal or for manual transmission vehicles depress the clutch pedal. The switch must be de- pressed and turned when changing into or out of 4L0. A WARNING e When parking, apply the parking brake before stopping the engine and make sure that the 4WD shift indicator light is on and the ATP warning light goes off. Otherwise, the vehicle could unexpect- edly move even if the automatic trans- mission is in the P position. 5-22 Starting and driving e The 4LO indicator light must stop blink- ing and rem. illuminated or turn off before shifting the transmission into gear. If the transmission selector or transmission shift lever is shifted from the (N) po: n to any other gear when the 4L0 indicator light is blinking, the vehicle may move unexpectedly. ACAUTION + Never shift the 4WD sl tween 4L0 and 4H while The 4H position provides greater trac- tion. Avoid excessive speed, as it will cause increased fuel consumption and higher oil temperatures, and could damage drivetrain components. Speeds over 62.5 MPH (100 km/h) in 4H is not recommended. ion provides maximum power and traction. Avoid raising ve- hicle speed excessively, as the maxi- mum speed is approximately 31 MPH (50 km/h). e When driving straight, shift the 4WD Shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position. Do not move the 4WD shift switch when making a turn or reversing. switch be- iving.

e Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (be- tween 2WD and 4H) while driving on steep downhill grades. Use the engine brake and low automatic transmission gears (D1 or D2) or manual transmis- sion (1st gear or 2nd gear) for engine braking. e Do not operate the 4WD shift switch (between 2WD and 4H) with the rear wheels spinning. + Do not drive on dry hard surface roads in the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on dry hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise and tire wear. NISSAN recommends driving in the 2WD position under these conditions. e The 4WD transfer case may not be shifted between 4H and 4LO at low am- bient temperatures and the transfer 4LO position indicator light may blink even when the 4WD shift switch is Shifted. After driving for a while you can change the 4WD transfer case between 4H and 4L0O. When driving on rough roads, e_ Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO. e_ Drive carefully according to the road surface conditions. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

When the vehicle is stuck, Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO. Use the Electronic Locking Rear Differential (E-Lock) system (if so equipped). Turn the switch ON while the vehicle is stationary and apply the throttle to try to free the vehicle. e_ Hit is difficult to free the vehicle, rock the vehicle back and forth between reverse and drive gears. e_Ifthe vehicle is stuck deep in mud, place stones or wooden blocks under the tires. Then try the recovery procedures above. Tire chains may be effective. ACAUTION e Do not spin the tires excessively. Tires will sink deep into the mud, making it ifficult to free the vehicle. e Avoid shifting gears with the engine running at high speeds as this may cause malfunction. LSD0145| AWD shift switch operations © Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the 2WD, 4H or 4LO position, depending on driving conditions. e If the 4WD shift switch is operated while making a turn, accelerating or decelerating or if the key switch is turned off while in the 4H or 4LO posi- tion, you may feel a jolt. This is not abnormal. e When the vehicle is stopped after mak- ing a turn, you may feel a slight joit after the selector lever is shifted to N or P. This occurs because the transfer clutch is released and not because of a malfunction. À CAUTION e When driving straight, shift the 4WD Shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position. Do not move the 4WD shift switch when making a turn or reversing. Do not shift the 4WD shift switch while driving on steep downhill grades. Use the engine brake and low automatic transmission gears (D1 or D2) or manual transmission (1st gear or 2nd gear) for engine braking. e Do not operate the 4WD shift switch with the rear wheels spinning. Before placing the 4WD shift switch in the 4H position from 2WD, ensure the vehicle speed is less than 62.5 MPH (100 km/h). Failure to do so can dam- age the 4WD system. + Never shift the 4WD shift switch be- tween 4LO and 4H while driving. AWD shift indicator light Starting and driving 5-23 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

LSDO147| The 4WD shift indicator light is located in the odometer display. The light should turn off within 1 second after turning the ignition switch to the ON position While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi- cator light will illuminate the position selected by the 4WD shift switch. e The 4WD shift indicator light may blink while shifting from one drive mode to the other. When the shifting is com- pleted, the 4WD shift indicator light will come on. 5-24 Starting and dr e If the 4WD warning light comes on, the AWD indicator light goes out. À CAUTION If the 4WD shift indicator light indication changes to 2WD when the 4WD shift switch is shifted to the 4H position at low ambient temperatures, the 2WD mode may be being engaged due to malfunc- tioning drive system. If the indicator does not return to normal and the 4WD warning light comes on, have the system checked by the nearest NISSAN dealer. AWD warning light Comes on or blinks Warning light Where There is a malfunc- tion in the 4-wheel drive system N17 Comes on The difference in wheel rotation is large = Blinks slowly The 4WD warning light is located in the meter. The 4WD warning light comes on when the key switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after the engine is started. I any malfunction occurs in the AWD system when the key switch is ON, the warning light will either remain illuminated or blink. I the 4WD waming light comes on, the 4WD shift indicator light goes out. A large difference between the diameters of front and rear wheels will make the warning light blink slowly (about once per two seconds). Change the 4WD shift switch into 2WD and do not drive fast. À CAUTION e If the warning light comes on or blinks slowly during operation, have your ve- hicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. e Shifting between 4H and 4L0O is not recommended when the 4WD warning light turns on. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

+ When the warning light comes on, the 2WD mode may be engaged even if the in 4H. Be especially ng. If corresponding parts are malfunctioning, the 4WD mode will not be engaged even if the AWD shift switch is shifted. + Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4L0 position on dry hard surface roads. Driv- ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4L0 may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear and increased fuel consumption. If the 4WD warning light turns on when you are driving on dry hard surface roads: — in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD. — in the 4LO position for automatic transmission vehicles, stop the ve- hicle and shift the transmission se- lector to the N position with the brake pedal depressed and shift the AWD shift switch to 2WD. the 4LO position for manual trans- sion vehicles, stop the vehicle and shift the transmission shift lever to the N position with the clutch pedal depressed and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD. e If the warning light is still on after the above operation, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR

DIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM (if so equipped) The E-Lock system can provide additional trac- tion and should only be used when a vehicle has become or is becoming stuck. This system oper- ates by electronically “locking" the two rear drive wheels together, allowing them to turn at the same speed. The system is used when it is not possible to free a stuck vehicle even when using the 4LO position (4 wheel drive vehicles). When added traction is required, activate the E-Lock system by pushing the switch ON. See “Electronic Locking Rear Differential (E-Lock) system switch" in the “Instruments and Controls" section. Once the system fully engages, the indi- cator light in the instrument panel will remain ON. When the system is activated, both rear wheels will engage, providing added traction. The rear wheels may momentarily slip or move to engage the system, and the system will only function up to approximately 4 MPH (7 km/h). Once the vehicle is free, the system should be turned OFF and driving resumed The Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) system is disabled and the ABS light iluminates when the E-Lock system is ON. Also, the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is disabled and the VDC light iluminates when the E-Lock system is ON. Starting and driving 5-25 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

A WARNING e Never leave the E-Lock system ON when driving on paved or hard-surfaced roads. Turning the vehicle may result in the rear wheels slipping and result in an accident and personal injury. After us- ing the E-Lock system to free the ve- hicle, turn the system OFF. + Use the E-Lock system only when free- ing a stuck vehicle. Try the 4LO position before using the E-Lock system. Never use the E-Lock system on a slippery road surface such as snow or ice sur- face. Using the E-Lock system when driving in these road conditions may cause unexpected movement of the ve- icle during engine braking, accelerat- ing or turning, which may result in an accident and serious personal injury. 5-26 Starting and dr À CAUTION e After using the E-Lock system, turn the switch OFF to prevent possible damage to driveline components from extended use. + Do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster than 12 mph (20 km/h) when the system is engaged. Doing so could damage drivetrain components. e Do not turn on the E-lock system while the tires are spi ing. Doing so could damage drivetrain components. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

WSD0050| A WARNING e Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may and cause a fire. e Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P (Park) for automatic transmission models or in an appropriate gear for manual transmis- sion models. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. Make sure the shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal. Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- tivate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in seri- ous accidents.

1. Firmiy apply the parking brake.

2. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) posi- tion. When parking on an uphill grade, place the shift lever in 1st gear. Automatic transmission models: Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park) position: To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline, itis a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: @

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: (®) Tum the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.

HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

CURB: © Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the cen- ter of the road if it moves. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the key. Starting and driving 5-27 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

POWER STEERING The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering. H the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you will still have control of the vehicle. However, much greater steering effort is needed, especially in Sharp turns and at low speeds. A WARNING If the engine is not running or is turned off whi driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be much harder to operate. 5-28 Starting and driving BRAKE SYSTEM The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. I one circuit malfunctions, you wil stil have braking at two wheels. BRAKE PRECAUTIONS Vacuum assisted brakes The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. lf the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis- tance will be longer. Using the brakes Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the brakes and pads faster, and reduce gas mileage. To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down à slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control. A WARNING + While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel- erating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident. e is not running or is turned g, the power assist for il not work. Braking will be the brakes harder. Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctiy. Parking brake break-in Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the best brake performance. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual and can be performed by a NISSAN dealer. ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) The anti-lock brake system controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock when braking abruptly or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing wheel lockup, the system helps the driver main- tain steering control and helps to minimize swerv- ing and spinning on slippery surfaces. Using the system Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. A WARNING Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances. Normal operation The anti-lock brake system does not operate at speeds below 3 - 6 MPH (5 - 10 km/h). (The speeds vary according to road conditions.) When driving, the anti-lock brake system con- trols the wheels so they will not lock when brak- ing abruptly or when braking on a slippery road. Thus, difficult steering and swerving of the ve- hicle due to locked wheels is minimized. The system detects the wheel rotation rate and elec- tronically controls the pressure applied to each brake. Slight vibration on the brake pedal accom- panied by noise usually occurs while the ABS system is operating. Such vibration and noise encountered during abrupt braking is not a prob- lem, but indicates that the system is functioning properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving. Self-test feature The anti-lock brake system consists of electronic sensors and hydraulic solenoids controlled by a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsa- tion in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of any malfunction. If the computer senses any malfunction, it switches the anti-lock brake system off and turns on the ABS brake warning light on the instrument panel. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti- lock assistance. Hthe light comes on during the self-test or while driving, take the vehicle to a NISSAN dealer for repair. A WARNING e The anti-lock brake system is a sophis- ticated device, but it cannot prevent ac- cidents resulting from careless or dan- gerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces, but remember that the stopping distance on slippery sur- faces will be longer than on normal surfaces even the anti-lock brake system. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow cov- ered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness. Always maintain a safe distance from the ve- hicle in front of you. Ultimately, the re- spon: ity for safety of self and others rests in the hands of the driver. e Tire type and condition of tires may also affect braking effectiveness. When replacing tires, install the speci- fied size of tires on all four wheels. Starting and driving 5-29 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

e When installing a spare tire, make sure is the proper size and type as speci- fied on the tire placard. For tire placard locati formation, refer to “Tire plac- ard” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. e Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec- tion of this manual. 5-30 Starting and dr ACTIVE BRAKE LIMITED SLIP (ABLS) SYSTEM (if so equipped) e ABLS is a form of traction control using sensors from the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) to transfer power from a slipping drive wheel to a wheel with more traction. The ABLS system applies braking to the slipping wheel, which helps redirect power to an- other wheel e_ On 4WD modelsthe ABLS system operates in both 4H and 4LO modes. On 2WD ve- hicles, the ABLS system operates on the drive axle only. e_ The ABLS system is always ON unless the system detects brake pad overheating. If high brake pad temperature is detected, it will turn OFF, but normal brake function will continue. ABLS will function even when the VDC system (if so equipped) is turned OFF. A WARNING The ABLS system provides increased trac- tion, but not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation or by careless driving or dangerous di g practices. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces, and always drive carefully. VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM (if so equipped) When accelerating or driving on slippery sur- faces, the tires may spin or slide. With the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system, sensors detect these movements and control the braking and engine output to help improve vehicle stability. When the vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system is operating, the SLIP indicator in the instrument panel blinks. e_Ifthe 4WD transfer case is shifted into 4L0 the BE _indicator light will come on and the VDC system wil be tumed off. See “Transfer case shifting procedures" earlier in this section. e_lfthe SLIP indicator blinks, the road condi- tions are slippery. Be sure to adjust your speed and driving to these conditions. See “Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off indicator light” in the “In- struments and controls” section. I the battery is removed or discharged, the trac- tion control system may be disabled and the SLIP and indicator lights will not turn off after 2 seconds when the ignition switchis tumed to the ON position. Perform the following proce- dure to reset the system: © Start the engine and set the steering wheel in the straight forward position [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

Drive the vehicle at speeds above 10 mph (15 km/h) for at least 10 minutes. «The VDC OFF indicator light should go off indicating the traction control system is op- erational. If you interrupt the reset procedure by turn- ing the ignition off, you will need to restart the reset procedure. If after driving the vehicle for more than 10 min- utes and the SLIP and lights remain illumi- nated in the instrument panel, have the vehicle dynamic control system checked by a NISSAN dealer. Hthe vehicle is operated with the vehicle dynamic control system off using the VDC OFF switch, most VDC functions will be turned off. The VDC system will still try to transfer power from a slip- ping drive wheel to one with more traction when the VDC system switch is OFF, The Slip indicator will flash if wheel spin is detected. The ABS will still operate with the VDC system off. When the VDC system is operating, you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is Working prop- erly. The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction. A WARNING e The vehicle dynamic control system is designed to help improve driving stabil- ity but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery sur- faces and always drive carefully. If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not stan- dard equipment or are extremely dete- riorated, the vehicle dynamic control system may not operate properly and the vehicle dynamic control off indica- tor light may come on.

Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If suspension parts such as shock absorb- ers, Struts, Springs, stabilizer bars and bushings are not NISSAN approved for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated the vehicle dynamic control system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and the VDC OFF indicator light may come on. When driving on extremely inclined sur- faces such as higher banked corners, the vehicle dynamic control system may not operate properly and the VDC OFF indicator light may come on. Do not drive on these types of roads. When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp, the vehicle dynamic control off indicator light may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface If wheels or tires other than the recom- mended ones are used, the vehicle dy- namic control system may not operate properly and the vehicle dynamic con- trol off indicator light may come on. The vehicle dynamic control system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road. Starting and driving 5-31 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

HILL DESCENT CONTROL (HDC) SYSTEM (if so equipped) A WARNING + Never rely solely on the hill descent control system to control vehicle speed when driving on steep down hill grades. Always drive carefully and attentively when using the hill descent control sys- tem and decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal if neces- sary. Be especially careful when driving on frozen, muddy or an extremely steep downbhill roads. Failure to control ve- hicle speed may result in a loss of con- trol of the vehicle and possible serious injury or death. e The hill descent control may not control the vehicle speed on a hill under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to control vehicle speed. Failure to do so may re- sult in a collision or serious personal injury. The hill descent control system helps maintain vehicle speed when driving under 15-21 mph (25-35 km/h) on steeper downhill grades. HDC is useful when engine braking alone in 4H or 4L cannot control vehicle speed. HDC applies the vehicle brakes to control vehicle speed allowing 5-32 Starting and dr the driver to concentrate on steering while reduc- ing the burden of brake and accelerator opera- tion. e When additional braking is required on steep downhill roads activate the HDC sys- tem by pushing the switch ON, see “Hill descent control (HDC) switch" in the “In- struments and controls” section: Once the system is activated the indicator light will remain on in the instrument panel, see “Hill descent control (HDC) system on indicator light” in the “Instruments and con- trols” section. If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed while the HDC system is on, the system will stop operating temporarily. As soon as the accelerator or brake pedal is released, the HDC system begins to function again if the HDC operating conditions are fuffilled For the best results, when descending steep downhill grades, the HDC switch should be ON and the selector lever in 2 (Second gear) or 1 (Low gear) for engine braking.

HILL START ASSIST (HSA) SYSTEM

(if so equipped) A WARNING «+ Never rely solely on the hill start assist system to prevent the vehicle from mov- ing backward on a Always drive carefully and attentively. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be especially careful when stopped on a hill on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards may re- sult in a loss of control of the vehicle and possible serious injury or death. e The hill start assist system is not de- signed to hold the vehicle at a standstill on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll backwards and may result in a on or serious personal injury. Il start assist may not prevent the le from rolling backwards on a hill under all load or road conditions. Al- ways be prepared to depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards. Failure to do so may result in a coll n or serious personal injury. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

The hill start assist system automatically keeps the brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards in the time it takes the driver to release the brake pedal and apply the accelerator when the vehicle is stopped on a hill. Hill start assist will operate automatically under the following conditions: © The selector lever is shifted to a forward or reverse gear. © The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill by applying the brake. The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and hill start assist will stop operating completely. Hill start assist will not operate when the selector leveris shifted to N or P or on a flat and level road.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de- icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob (if so equipped). ANTI-FRÉEZE In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem- perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection: For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual BATTERY the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi- mum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main- tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

I the vehicle is to be left outside without anti- freeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. For details, see *Changing engine coolant” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual. TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on dry pave- ment. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your ve- hicle on snowy or ioy roads, NISSAN recom- mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability informa- tion.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded

tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires. Starting and driving 5-33 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before install ing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer's suggestions. Use only SAE Class “S” chains. Class “S" chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are designed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body compo- nent required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device (tire chains or cables). The minimum clearances are determined us- ing the factory equipped tire size. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tension- ers when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure à tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a re- duced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and perfor- mance may be adversely affected. Never install tire chains on spare tires. Do not use tire chains on dry roads. 5-34 Starting and driving

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter: e_A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades. e_A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support. e_ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowsdrifts. © Extra window washer fluid to refill the reser- voir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW ORICE

A WARNING e Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have much less traction or “grip” under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded. + Whatever the condition, drive with cau- tion. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction. e Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement. e Allow greater following distances on slippery roads. e Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers. e Do not use the cruise control on slip- pery roads. e Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle. ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped) An engine block heater to assist in extreme cold temperature starting is available through a NISSAN dealer. A WARNING Do not use your heater with an ungrounded electrical system or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. You can be injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie +

6 In case of emergency First aid kit (if so equipped) Flat tire................. Tire pressure monitoring system. Changing a flat tire Jump starting ........ .. 6-8 Push starting... L6-10 If your vehicle overheats.…........................ 6-10 Towing your vehicle.…............... 6-11 Towing recommended by NISSAN . 6-12 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) .6-14 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

FIRST AID KIT (if so equipped) FLAT TIRE LCEO108 LCEO113 King cab model The first aid kit is located in the under-seat stor- age bins. To access the first aid kit: For King cab model, lift up the rear jump seat and remove net to remove the first aid kit. Refer to “Jump Seats” in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system" section ear- lier in the manual. For Crew cab model, lift up the rear bench seat and remove the net to remove the first aid kit Refer to “Folding the rear bench seat” in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system" section earlier in the manual. 6-2 In case of emergency Crew cab model

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM This vehicle is equipped with the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS). It monitors tire pres- sure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This system will acti- vate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For more details, refer 40 “Waring/indicator lights and audible remind- ers” in the “Instruments and controls” section, and “Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)" in the “Starting and driving" section. A WARNING e If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pres- sure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. + When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

e Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS. e Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be- low. Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

3. Park on a level surface and applythe parking

brake. Shift the manual transmission into R (Reverse), or the automatic transmission into P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to wam other traffic and to

signal professional road assistance person- nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle

and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle. A WARNING e Make sure the parking brake is securely ied and the manual transmission is d into R (Reverse), or the auto- matic transmission into P (Park). + Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous. e Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for profes- sional road assistance. WCE0044| Blocking wheels Place suitable blocks (D at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire © to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up. A WARNING Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury. In case of emergency 6-3 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

LCEO109) LCEO110| LCEO111| Getting the spare tire and tools For King Cab models: The tool storage compartment is located be- tween the two rear jump seats. Turn the knob from the lock to the unlock position and remove the lid from the tool storage compartment Remove the jack and jacking tools. 6-4 In case of emergency For Crew Cab models: The tools and tool case are located behind the rear bench seat. © Fold the rear bench seat down. Refer to “Folding the rear bench seat” in the “Safety- -Seats, seat belts and supplemental re- straint system" section earlier in this manual. e Remove the jack (D) and jacking tools (2. All models:

1. Fitthe square end of the jack rod into the

square hole of the wheel nut wrench to form a handle. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

2. Find the oval-shaped opening under the

middle of the tailgate. Pass the T-shaped end of the jack rod through the opening and direct it toward the spare tire winch, located directly above the spare tire. WCE0070|

8. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod into

the T-shaped opening of the spare tire winch. Apply pressure to keep the jack rod engaged in the spare tire winch and turn the jack rod counterclockwise to lower the spare tire.

4. Once the spare tire is completely lowered,

reach under the vehicle, remove the retainer chain, and carefully slide the tire from under the rear of the vehicle. ACAUTION Be sure to center the spare tire suspend- ing plate on the wheel and then lift the spare tire. Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire A WARNING + Never get under the vehicle wi supported only by the jack. If it is nec- essary to work under the vehicle, sup- port it with safety stands. Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change. e Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support. + Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary. In case of emergency 6-5 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

Never use blocks on or under the jack. Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials. e Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack. e Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off the ground. It may cause the vehicle to move. Always refer to the illustration for the correct placement and jack-up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type. Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instruc- tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by

turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground. 6-6 In case of emergency LCEO112

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up

point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. The jack-up points are indicated by stamped ar- rows on the side of the frame. The jack should be used on firm and level ground. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

3. Install the assembled jack rod into the jack

and rod. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground.

5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the

tire. WCE0063| Installing the spare tire The spare tire is designed for emergency use. See specific instructions under the heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte- nance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-

tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten

the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel

nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until they are tight. In case of emergency 6-7 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence illustrated. Lower the ve- hicle completely. A WARNING e Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident. e Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose. Retighten the wheel nuts after the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench. Wheel nut tightening torque: 98 ft-Ib (133 Nm) The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times. It is recom- mended that wheel nuts be tightened to Specifications at each lubrication interval. Adijust tire pressure to the COLD pressure. 6-8 In case of emergency COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the driver side center pillar.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-

ment in the vehicle. A WARNING e Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly se- cured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop. e The spare tire is d ned for emer- gency use. See specific instructions un- der the heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual. JUMP STARTING To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be fol- lowed. A WARNING e If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle. Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vi ty of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery. Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor- rosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, imme- diately flush the contacted area with water. e Keep battery out of the children. The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle. reach of [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

+ Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting. e Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause se- rious injury. e Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it. WCE0066| A WARNING Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury.

1. Ifthe booster battery is in another vehicle,

position the two vehicles to bring their bat- teries near each other. Do not allow the two vehicles to touch. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P (Park) (automatic transmission). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner, etc.). Remove vent caps on the battery (if so equipped). Cover the battery with an old cloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-

lustrated (®, ®), ©, ®). In case of emergency 6-9 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

À CAUTION © Always connect positive (+) to positive (+) and negative (—) to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery. e Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine com- partment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and

let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-

hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en- gine of the vehicle being jump started A CAUTION Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, turn the key off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect

the negative cable and then the positive cable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be

sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid. 6-10 In case of emergency PUSH STARTING À CAUTION + Automatic transmission models cannot be push-started or tow-started. At- tempting to do so may cause transmis- sion damage. e Three-way catalyst equipped models Should not be started by pushing. The three-way catalyst may be damaged. e Never try to start the vehicle by towing it. When the engine starts, the forward surge could cause the vehicle to collide with the tow vehicle.

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

A WARNING e Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire. e To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap while the engine is still hot. When the radiator or coolant reser- voir cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury. + Do not open the hood if steam is com- ing out. H your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading and the illumination of the engine oil pressure/engine coolant temperature high indicator light), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the following steps.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply

the parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park). Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the

windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for

steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. (If steam or cool ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

A WARNING If steam or water is coming from the en- gine, stand clear to prevent getting burned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage or

looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is missing or loose, or the cooling fan does not run, stop the en- gine. A WARNING Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or get caught in, engine belts or the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time when the coolant temperature is high.

6. Afterthe engine cools down, check the cool-

ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running. Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN dealer

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam- age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail- able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera- tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle. it is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions: A WARNING e Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed. + Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck. ACAUTION + When towing, make sure that the trans- mission, axles, steering system and powertrain are in working condition. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used. e Always attach safety chains before towing. In case of emergency 6-11 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie +

For information about towing your vehicle behind a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing" in the “Technical and consumer information” sec- tion of this manual. 6-12 In case of emergency ACE1019|

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

NISSAN Two-wheel drive models NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (rear) wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated. À CAUTION e Never tow automatic transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward), as this may s and expensive damage to tow the vehicle with the front wheels raised always use towing dollies under the rear wheels. e When towing automatic or manual transmission models with the front wheels on the ground or on towing dollies: — Turn the ignition key to the OFF po- on, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a lar device. Never secure the steering wheel by turning the il nition key to the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

e If you have to tow manual transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground (if you do not use towing dol- lies) or four wheels on the ground: e Always release the parking brake. e Move the transmission shift lever to the N (Neutral) po: n. + Observe the following restricted tow- ing speeds and distances for manual transmission models only: Speed: Below 60 MPH (97 km/h) Distance: Less than 500 miles (805 km) If the speed or distance must necessarily be greater, remove the propeller shaft before towing to prevent damage to the transmission: WCE009! Four-wheel drive models NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be used when towing your vehicle or place the ve- hicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated. ACAUTION e Never tow automatic transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground, as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is nec- essary to tow the vehicle with the front wheels raised always use towing dollies under the rear wheels. e When towing automatic or manual transmission models with the front wheels on the ground or on towing dollies: + Move the 4WD shift switch to the 2H position. © Turn the ignition key to the OFF po- on, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by turning the ig- nition key to the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism. In case of emergency 6-13 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

e If you have to tow manual transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground (if you do not use towing dol- lies) or four wheels on the ground: + Move the 4WD shift switch to the 2H position. e Move the transmission shift lever to the N (Neutral) position. e Always release the parking brake. + Observe the following restricted tow- ing speeds and distances for manual transmission models only: Speed: Below 60 MPH (97 km/h) Distance: Less than 500 miles (805 km) If the speed or distance must necessarily be greater, remove the propeller shaft before towing to prevent damage to the transmission: 6-14 In case of emergency LCE0103| VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle) A WARNING e Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. e Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged. À CAUTION Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle or the towing hooks (if so equipped). Otherwise, the vehicle body will be damaged. Use the towing hook (if so equipped) only to free a vehicle stuck in sand, Snow, mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle for a long distance using only the tow- ing hook. The towing hook is under tremendous force when used to free a stuck vehicle. Never pull the hook at an angle. Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the sus- pension, steering, brake or cooling systems. Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure:

2. Make sure the area in front and behind the

vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear

an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-

ward. © Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and D (Drive). © Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion: Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R and D. © Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55 km/h).

5. If the vehicle can not be freed after a few

tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle. In case of emergency 6-15 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

MEMO 6-16 In case of emergency

CLEANING EXTERIOR In order to maintain the appearance of your ve- hicle, it is important to take proper care of it. To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your vehicle as soon as you can: e_ after a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain. e_ after driving on coastal roads. when contaminants such as soot, bird drop- pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface. when dust or mud builds up on the surface. Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area. When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover. Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover. WASHING Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water. 7-2 Appearance and care À CAUTION e Do not wash the vehicle strong household soap, strong chemical deter- gents, gasoline or solvents. + Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun- light or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted. e Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign sub- stances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged. Rinse the vehicle thoroughiy with plenty of clean water. Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be cleaned regular. Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt. À damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots. WAXING Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is recommended to remove built-up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re-applying wax A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product. © Waxyour vehicle only after a thorough wash- ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax. e Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish. Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks. REMOVING SPOTS Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

UNDERBODY In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un- derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe- riod and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, retreated. GLASS Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with à film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film. À CAUTION When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electri cal conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash the wheels regularly, especially during win- ter months in areas where road salt is used. If not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels. CHROME PARTS Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non- abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish TIRE DRESSINGS NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub- ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may react with the coating and form a compound This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint. I you choose to use a tire dressing, take the following precautions e_ Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat- ing on the tire dissolves more easily with an oil-based tire dressing. e_Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to remove). e_ Wipe off excess tire dressing using à dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com- pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves. e_Alow the tire dressing to dry as recom- mended by tire dressing manufacturer. Appearance and care 7-3 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

CLEANING INTERIOR Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristied brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp- ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dy, soft cloth. Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather Before using any fabric protector, read the manu- facturer's recommendations. Some fabric pro- tectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens. ACAUTION e Never use benzine, thinner or any simi- lar material. e Small particles can be abrasive and damaging to leather surfaces and should be removed promptly. Do not use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter- gents or ammonia-based cleaners as they may damage the leather's natural finish. 7-4 Appearance and care + Never use fabric protectors unless rec- ommended by the manufacturer. e Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam- age the lens cover. FLOOR MATS The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex- tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. No matter what mats are used, be sure they are fitted for your vehicle and are properly positioned in the footwell to prevent interference with pedal operation. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they be- come excessively worn. WAI000| Floor mat positioning aid (driver's side only) This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket to act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your ve- hicle model. The drivers side floor mat has a grommet hole incorporated in it. Position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in the footwel. Periodically check to make certain the mats are properly positioned. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

SEAT BELTS The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance” inthe “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemen- tal restraint system” section of this manual A WARNING Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up inthe retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing. CORROSION PROTECTION

CORROSION e_ The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas. Damage to paint and other protective coat- ings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents. ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

INFLUENCE THE RATE OF

CORROSION Moisture Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve- hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion Relative humidity Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used. Temperature High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro- sion to those parts which are not well ventilated. Air pollution Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler- ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel- erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE

FROM CORROSION © Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean. e_ Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible. e_ Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation. © Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible. Appearance and care 7-5 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

À CAUTION e NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de- bris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom. e Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic compo- nents inside the vehicle as this may damage them. Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and_deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders. In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically. For additional protection against rust and corro- sion, which may be required in some areas, con- sult a NISSAN dealer. 7-6 Appearance and care [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

8 Maintenance and do- Maintenance requirements. ……...................... General maintenance . Explanation of general maintenance items Maintenance precautions.… eee Engine compartment check locations Engine cooling system .…........... Checking engine coolant level Changing engine coolant…. Engine oil. Checking engine oil level Changing engine oil . Changing engine oil filter 5-speed automatic transmission fluid Power steering fluid. . Brake and clutch fluid. Brake fluid. Clutch fluid Window washer fluid . Window washer fluid reservoir .............. Battery... Jump starting Variable otage Control System . Drive belts . de t-yourself Spark plugs. Replacing spark plug - Air cleaner... In-cabin microfiter. Windshield wiper blades Cleaning Replacing . Parking brake and brake pedal Checking parking brake .… Checking brake pedal Brake booster. Fuses .…..... Engine compartiment. Passenger compartment Keyfob battery replacement …. Lights … . Headlights. Exterior and interior lights. Wheels and tires . Tire pressure... Tire labeling.… Types of tires.… Tire chains…. Changing wheels and tires [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Your new NISSAN has been designed to have minimum maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save you both time and money. However, some daÿ-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your NIS- SAN's good mechanical condition, as well as its emission and engine performance. I is the owner's responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed. As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte- nance chain. Scheduled maintenance For your convenience, both required and optional scheduled maintenance items are described and listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide." You must refer to that guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals. General maintenance General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day-to-day op- ration. They are essential for proper vehicle op- eration. lt is your responsibility to perform these maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed. 8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools. These checks or inspections can be done by you, a qualiied technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN dealer. Where to go for service If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists who are kept up-to-date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership training programs. They are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve- hicles before they work on your vehicle, rather than after they have worked on it. You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer's service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle — in a reliable and economic way. GENERAL MAINTENANCE During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be per- formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a NISSAN dealer do it promptiy. In addition, you should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required. When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau- tions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL

MAINTENANCE ITEMS Additional information on the following items with “*” is found later in this sec: Outside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified. Doors and engine hood Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequentiy Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim. Road wheel nuts* When checking the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary. Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips. If neces- sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear. Wheel alignment and balance [f the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a Straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. Ifthe steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed. © For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam- aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility. Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. Inside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when per- forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve- hicle, etc. Additional information on the following items with an “*”’ is found later in this sec- tion. Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not bind or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal. Automatic transmission P (Park) position mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that your vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes. Brake pedal and booster* Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure it has the proper distance under it when depressed fully. Check the brake booster function. Be certain to keep the floor mat away from the pedal Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied. Parking brake* Check that the lever/pedal has the proper travel and confirm that your vehicle is held securely on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied Seats Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and the locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched positions. Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt web- bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage. Steering wheel Check for changes inthe steer- ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hard steering or strange noises. Warning lights and chimes Make sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly. Windshield wiper and washer* Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

Windshield defroster Check that the air comes out ofthe defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner. Under the hood and vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel) Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve- hicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level. Brake fluid levels* Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir. Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level when the engine is cold Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily. Engine oil level* Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of 8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See the carbon monoxide warning in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected imme- diately. Power steering fluid level* and lines Check the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. Radiator and hoses Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose connections. Underbody The underbody is frequently ex posed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances from the underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thor- oughly flushed with plain water, in those areas where mud and dirt may have accumulated. See the “Appearance and care” section of this manual. Windshield washer fluid* Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precau- tions which should be closely observed. A WARNING e Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap- ply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. Move the shift selector lever to P (Park). + Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs. + Never leave the engine or automatic ion related component har- connected while the ignition switch is in the ON position. e Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position. © Your vehicle is equipped with an auto- matic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition key is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan. If you must work with the engine run- ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts. It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle. Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle. If you must run the engine in an en- closed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape. Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is neces- Sary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands. Keep smoking materials, flame and Sparks away from the fuel tank and battery. On gasoline engine models with the multiport fuel injection (MFI) system, the fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off. À CAUTION + Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down. + Avoid contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. AI- ways conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid. This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform. A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail- able. See “Owner's Manual/Service Manual or- der information” in the “Technical and consumer information" section of this manual. You should be aware that incomplet or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, have it done by a NISSAN dealer. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

5. Engine oil dipstick

6. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reser-

11. Engine coolant reservoir

NOTE: Engine cover removed for clarity. WDI0506| 8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

5. Engine oil dipstick

Brake fluid reservoir Air cleaner Drive belt location Radiator cap

10. Power steering fluid reservoir

11. Engine coolant reservoir

NOTE: Engine cover removed for clarity. WDI0507 Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

The engine cooling system is filed at the factory with Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant to provide year-round anti- freeze and coolant protection.The anti-freeze so- lution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Ad- ditional engine cooling system additives are not necessary. A WARNING + Never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. See precautions in “If your vehicle overheats” found in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. e The radiator is equipped with a pres- sure type radiator cap. To prevent en- gine damage, use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap. 8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself Outside temperature Genuine | Demineral- down to NISSAN ized or dis- Long Life | tilled water — = Antifreeze/ c F Coolant or equivalent -35 -30 50% 50% À CAUTION When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (green) or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti- freeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water. The use of other types of coolant solutions or coolant colors, such as or- ange, may damage the engine cooling system. LDI0436 Type A

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below the MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level The engine coolant reservoir is a pressur- ized tank. When installing the cap, tighten it until a clicking sound is heard. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

LDI0466 Type B If the cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN dealer.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant The service procedure can be found in the NISSAN Service Manual. Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheat- ing. A WARNING e To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the en- gine is hot. + Never remove the radiator or engine coolant reservoir cap when the en is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. e Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. e Keep coolant out of the reach of chil- dren and pets. Engine coolant must be disposed of proper. Check your local regulations. ENGINE OIL LDI0437 Type A

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Parkthe vehicle on a level surface and apply

2. Startthe engine and let it idle until it reaches

operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10

minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil

level. should be between the H (High) and L (Low) marks ®. This is the normal oper- ating oil level range. If the oil level is below the L (Low) mark (&), remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening. Do not overfill ©).

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions. 8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself A CAUTION Oil level should be checked regularly. Op- erating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty. VO40DE

1. Parkthe vehicle on a level surface and apply

2. Startthe engine and let it idle until it reaches

operating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap @ by turning it

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug.

5. Remove the drain plug © with a wrench by

turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oil. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

WDIO501 QR25DE H the oil filter is to be changed, remove and replace it at this time. See “Changing engine oil filter" later in this section A WARNING + Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. e Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible. + Keep used engine oil out of reach of children. À CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot. e Waste oil must be disposed of prop- erly. e Check your local regulations.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new

washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive force. Drain plug tightening torque:

22 - 29 ft-Ib (29 - 39 Nm)

7. Refill engine with recommended oil through

the oil filer opening, then install the oil filer cap securely. See “Capacities and recommended fuel/ubricants” in the “Technical and con- sumer information” section of this manual for drain and refill capacity. The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around

the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re- quired

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10

minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

1. Parkthe vehicle on a level surface and apply

2. Tum the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter.

4. Unscrew the plate covering the oil filter ex-

posing the filter, (For VO4ODE engine only)

5. Loosen the oil filter @) with an oil filter

wrench by tuning it counterclockwise. Then remove the oil filter by tuning it by hand. 8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself QR25DE À CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot.

6. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with

a clean rag. Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface of the en- gine.

7. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean

8. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance

is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

9. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the oil filter. Correct as required.

10. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10

5-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID When checking or replacement is required, we recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing. A WARNING e Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF. Do not mix with other fluids. transmission fluid le NISSAN Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic trans- mission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. The specified automatic transmission fluid is also described on caution labels located in the engine compartment.

POWER STEERING FLUID

WDI0282 LDI0468 Type A Type B The fluid level should be checked using the HOT MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir ACAUTION at fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° - + DO NOT OVERFILL. 80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on the le Recommended fluid is Genuine power steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera- tures of 32° - B6°F (0° - 30°C). H the fluid is below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN PSF. Remove the cap and fill through the opening. NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

For further brake and clutch fluid specification information, refer to “Capacities and recom- mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumer information" section of this manual. A WARNING Use only new fluid from a sealed con- tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake and clutch sys- tems. The use of improper fluids can dam- age the brake system and affect the vehi- cle’s stopping ability. A CAUTION Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur- faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is led, immediately wash the surface with water. 8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself LDI0463 LDI0463 BRAKE FLUID Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line. f fluid must be added frequently, the system should be checked by a NISSAN dealer. CLUTCH FLUID Check the clutch fluid level in the reservoir (manual transmissions only). If the fluid level is below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added fre- quently, the system should be checked by a NISSAN dealer. For further brake and clutch fluid specification information, refer to “Capacities and recom- mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

RESERVOIR Fillthe window washer fluid reservoir periodically. Add window washer fluid when the low window washer fluid warning light comes on. To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the cap off the reservoir tank and pour the window washer fluid into the tank opening. Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer's in- structions for the mixture ratio. Refil the reservoir more frequentiy when driving conditions require an increased amount of win- dow washer fluid Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind- shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti- freeze or equivalent. À CAUTION e Do not substitute engine anti-freeze coolant for window washer solution. This may result in damage to the paint. + Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reser- voir tank. + Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturers recom- mended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank. Do not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concen- trate and water. BATTERY e_ Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Any corrosion should be washed off with a solu- tion of baking soda and water e Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened. e_lfthe vehicle is not to be used for 80 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent discharge. A WARNING «+ Do not expose the battery to flames or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas gener- ated by the battery is explosive. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. e Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat, reduce bat- tery life, and in some cases lead to an explosion. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

e When working on or near a battery, al- ways wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry. e Battery posts, terminals and related ac- cessories contain lead and lead com- pounds. Wash hands after handling. e Keep battery out of the reach of children. 8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself WDI0224|

1. Remove the battery caps with a screwdriver

as shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery case. LDI0302

2. Check the fluid level in each cell If it is

necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level up to the bottom of the filler opening. Do not overfill. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

SYSTEM Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level. JUMP STARTING H jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting” in the “In case of emergency" section of this manual. If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. Contact a NISSAN dealer. H you add electrical accessories to your vehicle ground it to the body ground (&) located near the battery along the negative battery cable. LDI0454| À CAUTION e Do not ground accessories directly to the battery terminal. Doing so will by- pass the variable voltage control sys- tem and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. e Use electrical accessories with the en- gine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage control system. This system measures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

LDI0449 . Visually inspect the belt(s) for signs of un- . Have the belts checked regularly for condi- VO40DE Power steering fluid pump Cooling fan Air conditioner compressor Crankshatt Generator A WARNING Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK position. The engine could rotate unexpectedly. HnEON = 8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself usual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. the belt is in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer. tion and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule found in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”. LDI0461 QR25DE Power steering fluid pump Water pump Air conditioner compressor Crankshaft Generator CESR [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

Platinum-tipped spark plugs It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped spark plugs as frequently as conventional type spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol- low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re- gapping. e Always replace spark plugs with rec- ommended or equivalent ones. A WARNING Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely. A CAUTION Be sure to use the correct socket to re- move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs. H replacement is required, see your NISSAN dealer for assistance. AIR CLEANER LDI0376 Type A The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte- nance Guide." When replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the cover with a damp cloth. To remove the air cleaner filter Type A: @ Loosen the screw. © Disconnect the electrical connector. © Push down on the clips and remove the air cleaner cover. Remove the air cleaner filter. To remove the air cleaner filter Type B: Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

LDI0465 Type B . Unlatch the clips @, ®, ©. . Push down half of air cleaner to clear the bottom retainers. Lift up on half of air cleaner to remove the air cleaner filter 8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself A WARNING e Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or oth- ers to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the stops the flame if the engine backfires. If itisn’tthere, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed. + Never pour fuel into the throttie body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury. IN-CABIN MICROFILTER The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air- borne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors. The fier is located behind the glove box. Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for change intervals. To replace the filter, perform the following proce- dure: LDI0442

1. Open the glove box and press in on the

sides so that it will open completely allowing it to hang by the cord. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

2. Remove the filter cover bolt and remove the

filter cover. NOTE: The filters are marked with air flow arrows. The end of the filter with the arrow should face the rear of the vehicle. The arrows should face downward.

8. Insert the first filter into the housing and slide

it over to the right. Insert the second filter into the housing.

4. Replace the filter cover.

5. Install the glove box door.

6. Fill out the date information on the small

replacement label and attach it to the glove box lid.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

CLEANING H your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield. Clean the outside ofthe windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water. Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear water. If your wind- shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades. ACAUTION Worn windshield wiper blades can dam- age the windshield and impair driver vision. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

WD10408 REPLACING Replace the wiper blades if they are womn.

1. Liftthe wiper arm away from the windshield.

@ Push the release tab, then move the wiper blade down the wiper arm to remove. @ Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper

arm until it clicks into place.

5. Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in the

groove. 8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself À CAUTION e After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position; otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened. e Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass; otherwise the arms may be dam- 4 aged from wind pressure.

LDI0443| If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle (®). This may cause clogging or improper windshield washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin @) [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

From the released position, pull the parking brake lever up slowly and firmly. Ifthe number of clicks is out of the range listed, see a NISSAN dealer. Range: 6-8 clicks under pulling force of 44 Ib (196 N).

CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL

With the engine running, check the distance A between the upper surface of the pedal and the metal floor. If it is out of the range listed, see a NISSAN dealer. Range: 4.1-4.8 in (103-123 mm) under a de- pressing force of 110 Ib (490 N). Self-adjusting brakes Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes. The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied. A WARNING See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system check if the brake pedal height does not return to normal. Brake pad wear indicators The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re- placement, a high pitched scraping or screech- ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible ifthe wear indicator sound is heard. Under some driving or climate conditions, occa- sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system. Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For more information regarding brake inspections, see the appropriate mainte- nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser- vice and Maintenance Guide”. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

BRAKE BOOSTER Check the brake booster function as follows

1. With the engine off, press and release the

brake pedal several times. When brake pedal movement (distance of travel) remains the same from one pedal application to the next, continue on to the next step.

2. While depressing the brake pedal, start the

engine. The pedal height should drop a little.

3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the

engine. Keep the pedal depressed for about 80 seconds. The pedal height should not change.

4. Run the engine for one minute without de-

pressing the brake pedal, then tu it off Depress the brake pedal several times. The pedal travel distance will decrease gradually with each depression as the vacuum is re- leased from the booster. I the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer. 8-24 Maintenance and do FUSES LDI0455) LDI0457 Two types of fuses are used. Type Ais used in the fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type B is used in the passenger compartment fuse box. Type À fuses are provided as spare fuses. They are stored in the passenger compartment fuse box Type À fuses can be installed in the engine com- partment and passenger compartment fuse boxes. I a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse, the type À fuse will not be level with the fuse pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not affectthe performance of the fuse. Make sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely. Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under- hood fuse boxes. Only use type À fuses in the underhood fuse boxes. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

LDI0444 ENGINE COMPARTMENT À CAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire. I any electrical equipment does not come on, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the

tab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The

fuse puller is located in the center ofthe fuse block in the passenger compartment. WDI10452

5. Ifthe fuse is open @), replace it with a new

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer. Fusible links If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace with only genuine NISSAN parts. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

LDI0445 WDI0452 LDI0456 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT À CAUTION Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire. If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight

2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself Type A Type B

4. lfthe fuse is open (@), replace it with a known

5. Push the fuse box cover to install.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

KEYFOB BATTERY REPLACEMENT

LDI0484| Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows: @ Open the lid using a coin @. @ Remove the battery (). Install a new batte: with the “+" facini Ty g down. Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent. @ Close the lid securely.

button, then the À button two or three times to check the key- fob operation. If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement, perform step 5. e An improperly disposed battery can hurt the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal. e The keyfob is water-resistant; how- ever, if it does get wet, immediately wipe completely dry. e The operational range of the keyfob extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. This range may vary with conditions. FCC Notice: Changes or modifications not expressly ap- proved by the party responsible for compli- ance could void the user's authority to op- erate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, in- cluding interference that may cause undes- ired operation of the device. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

LIGHTS HEADLIGHTS The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. À bulb can be replaced from inside the engine compartment without removing the headlight as- sembly. ACAUTION igh pressure halogen gas is sealed side the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped. e When handling the bulb, do not touch the glass envelope. e DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB e Use the same number and wattage as nally installed: Wattage 65/55Bulb No. HB5/9007* *: Always check with the Parts Depart- ment at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information. + Do not leave the bulb out of the head- light reflector for a long period of time as dust, moisture and smoke may enter the headlight body and affect the per- formance of the headlight. 8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself + Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer. LDI0446| Removing the headlight bulb

Disconnect the electrical connector from the rear end of the bulb. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

4. Tum the bulb retaining ring counterclock-

wise until it is free form the headlight reflec- tor and then remove it

5. Carefully remove the headlight bulb. Do not

DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB.

2. Install and tighten the bulb retainer.

e Be sure the lip of the bulb socket con- tacts the headlight body.

8. Push the electrical connector into the bulb

plastic base until it snaps and stops.

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*' Headight 65/55 9007 (HB5) Turn signal light/Parking light 28/8 8457K Side marker 38 194 Rear combination light Turn signal 27 3156AK Stop/Tail 2718 8157K Back-up 18 921 License plate light 5 216 Fog light"? (if so equipped) 55 Hi1 Map lights/ personal lights 8 AL38 Room light 8 ALA41 High-mounted stop light/cargo lights*? “Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information. “The bulb is not serviceable in-vehicle. See a NISSAN dealer for assistance. Maintenance and do: [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

WDI0514 8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself NOmBON = Map lights/personal lights Room light High-mount stoplight/cargo lights License plate light Rear combination light Fog light (if so equipped) Headlight assembly WDI10306| Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover. {} _:Indicates bulb removal f : Indicates bulb installation [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/26/05—tbrooks 1

FAN WDI10300 Room light Use a cloth (D to protect the housing. Rear combination light Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

WDI0411 License plate light 8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

If you have a flat tire, see the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. TIRE PRESSURE Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) This vehicle is equipped with the tire pres- sure monitoring system (TPMS). It moni- tors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warn- ing light is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). Also, this system may not de- tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving). For more details, refer to “Low tire pres- sure warning light”in the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tire pressure monitor- ing system (TPMS)" in the “Starting and driving” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency" section. Tire inflation pressure Check the tire pressures (including the spare) often and always prior to long dis- tance trips. The recommended tire pres- sure specifications are shown on the FMVS.S./C.M.VS.S. label or the Tire and Loading Information label (if so equipped) under the "Cold Tire Inflation Pressure” heading. The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures should be checked regularly because: e Most tires naturally lose air over time. © Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking. The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

Incorrect tire pressure, including un- der inflation, may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling. A WARNING e Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident. e The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)_is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.VS.S. label. The vehicle weight capacity is indi- cated on the Tire and Loading Information label (if so equipped). Do not load your ve- hicle beyond this capacity. Over- loading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operat- ing conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable han- dling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified ca- pacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components. e Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level. © Do not drive your vehicle over 85 MPH (137 km/h) unless it is equipped with high speed rated tires. Driving faster than 85 MPH (137 km/h) may result in tire fail- ure, loss of control and possible injury. itional information re- garding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Infor- mation Booklet. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

00 kPa. XX PSI 0 aa 2 PSI LDI0392 Type A Tire and loading information label (if so equipped) ® Seating capacity: The maximum num- ber of occupants that can be seated in the vehicle. @© Vehicle load limit: See loading infor- mation in the “Technical and con- sumer information” section. @ Original tire size: The size of the tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory. 8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself @ Coldtire inflation pressure: Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 8 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire wear, vehicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc. up to the vehicles GVWR. Tire size — refer to “Tire labeling” later in this section. and @ Spare tire size or compact spare tire size (if so equipped). [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

PRESSION DE GONFLAGE RECOMMANDEE DS PNEUS FROIDS TIRE SIZE DIMENSIONS KPa (psi) P235/75R15 P245/75R16 P265/70R16 P265/75R16 P265/65R17 REAR: 240 (35) LDI0462 LDI0393| Type B Tire placard (if so equipped) @ Tire size: The size of the tires origi- nally installed on the vehicle at the factory. © Recommended cold tire inflation pressure: Inflate the tires to this pres- sure when the tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The recom- mended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best bal- ance of tire wear, vehicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicles GVWR. Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from the

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely

onto the valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the valve stem side- Ways, or air will escape. If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge

stem and compare to the specifica- tion shown on the FM.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label or the Tire and Loading Information label (if so equipped).

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too

much air is added, press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure. Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not

drive the vehicle faster than the tire P215/65R15 95H speed rating. PB 28 6 BR 15 9% H # Li # # Li Li) # WDI0395 Example @ Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H) 4. R: The "R" stands for radial.

1. P: The "P' indicates the tire is de- 5. Two-digit number (15): This number

signed for passenger vehicles (not all is the wheel or rim diameter in inches. tires have this information). 6. Two- orthree-digit number (95): This

2. Three-digit number (215): This num- number is the tire's load index. lt is a

ber gives the width in millimeters of measurement of how much weight the tire from sidewall edge to side- each tire can support. You may not wall edge. find this information on all tires be-

8. Two-digit number (65): This number, cause it is not required by law.

known as the aspect ratio, gives the tire's ratio of height to width. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the "Depart-

ment Of Transportation." The symbol can be placed above, below or to the left or right of Tire Identification Num- ber.

identification mark Manufacturer's

8. Two-digit code: Tire size

8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-

6. Four numbers represent the week

and year the tire was built. For ex- ample, the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2008. fthese numbers are missing, then look on the other sidewall of the tire. @ Tire ply composition and material The number of layers or plies of rubber- coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur- ers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. @ Maximum permissible inflation pres- sure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible in- flation pressure. @ Maximum load rating This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be car- ried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory in- stalled tire. © Term of "tubeless” or "tube type” Indicates whether the tire requires an in- ner tube (“tube type") or not (“tubeless”). © The word "radial” [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

The word "radial” is shown if the tire has radial structure. Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or brand name is shown. Other Tire-related Terminology In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section, intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out- ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.

A WARNING e When changing or replacing tires, be sure all four tires are of the same type (i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and construction. A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability. Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. e For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In- formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa- n” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa- tion Booklet. All season tires NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod- els to provide good performance all year, includ- ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas. Summer tires NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially re- duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating “M&S" on the tire sidewall. I you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels. Snow tires I snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex- ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. If you install snow tires, they must be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires. TIRE CHAINS Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer's suggestions. Use only SAE class “S” chains. Class "S” chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de- signed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device (tire chains or cables). The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tire size. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufac- turer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully load- ing your vehicle when using tire chains. In addi- tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected 8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself Tire chains must be installed only on the rear wheels and not on the front wheels. Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress. Use only the 2WD range when driving on clear paved roads. WDI0258|

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer- gency” section in this manual for tire re- placing procedures. As soon as possible, wheel nuts to the spec with a torque wrench. tighten the [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

Wheel nut tightening torque: 98 ft-Ib (133 N-m) The wheel nuts must be kept tight- ened to specifications at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval. A WARNING e After rotating the tires, check and adjust the tire pressure. e Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.). e Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation. e For additional information re- garding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Infor- mation Booklet. WDI0259|

Tire wear and damage A WARNING e Tires should be periodically in- spected for wear, cracking, bulg- ing or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found, the tire(s) should be replaced. e The original tires have built-in tread wear indicators. When the wear indicators are visible, the tire(s) should be replaced. © Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal jury. fit is necessary to repair the spare tire, contact a NISSAN dealer. e For additional information re- garding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Infor- mation Booklet. Replacing wheels and tires When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread design, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. Recommended types and sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual Maintenance and do-i yourself 8-41 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

A WARNING + Theuse oftires other than those recom- mended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, s-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, ground clearance, body-to- tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these ef- fects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury. e If the wheels are changed for any rea- son, always replace with wheels which have the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a different off-set could cause premature tire wear, degrade ve- hicle handling characteristics and/or terference with the brake cs/drums. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Re- fer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Techni- cal and consumer information” section of this manual for wheel off-set dimensions. 8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting. Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS. Do not install a deformed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning. The use of retread tires recommended. For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In- formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa- tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa- tion Booklet. is not ex Four-wheel drive models ACAUTION Always use tires of the same type, size, brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), and tread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles which will cause excessive tire wear and may dam- age the transmission, transfer case and differential gears. I excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with tires of the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern. The tire pressure and wheel alignment should also be checked and corrected as necessary. Contact a NISSAN dealer. Wheel balance Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling andtire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal- anced as required. Wheel balance service should be per- formed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

e For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor- mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In- formation Booklet . Care of wheels © Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle 40 maintain their appearance. «Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed. + Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels. e_ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead. e NISSAN recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter. Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-43 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

MEMO 8-44 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

9 Technical and consumer information Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ..9-2 Fuel recommendation . . 9-8 Engine oi and oil filter recommendetion 9-5 Recommended SAE viscosity number . ..9-6 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations .............................. O6 Specifications... 9-7 Engine 9-7 Wheels and tires 9-8 Dimensions and weights …. 9-8 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country 9-0 Vehicle identification . Vehicle identification number (IN) plate Vehicle identification number (chassis number) Engine serial number. … FMVS.S/C.M.V.SSS. certification label. Emission control information label Tire and loading information label... Air conditioner specification label... Installing front license plate Vehicle loading information Terms............... Vehicle load capacity . Securing the load. . Utili-track" channel ‘system (fso > equipped . Loading tips ere Truck-camper loading information. Crew Cab Models .............. King Cab models… Special Body vehicles. . Location for center of gravity Vehicle load weight capacity Measurement of weights … Towing a trailer... Maximum load limits Towing load/specification Towing safety... Flat towing. Uniform tire quality grading Emission control system warranty Reporting safety defects (US only) Readiness for inspection/maintenance (/M) test Event data recorders. en Owners Manual/Service Manual order information ee In the event of a collision ....................... [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

FUEL/LUBRICANTS The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity. Bars een EE LE de Era) Conde 29 Gocina system With reservoir QR2SDE 2-1/2 gal 2-1/8 gal 924 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent Power steering fluid (PSF) instructions in the “Maintenance and do-it- Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent"5 Brake and clutch fluid yourself section. Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid 6 or equvalent DOT S Mpneque = = = D 2 im Son De) nn = = = RFC RP ©]: For luthor detail, 00 Fuel recommendaion 22i For lurher dela, 08 “Engine dl and ie recommendations, “$i For her dela, so “Rogommandd SAË engine oi vec “4: Using automate transmission fui other than Genuine NISSAN Mat J ATF wil cause detorioration in drveabity and automati transmission durablt, and may damage 1he automatic ranemiseion, which is not covered by he MSSAN now vohcie imited warann “5: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRON® IUMERCON®, or equivalent ATF may also be used. “8: Aalablo in maniand USA Evough your NSSAN dealer 27: For lier dota, 00 ‘Ar condhiohor spouihcalion Label F8:Fa lg da, es “Chargng ee 0 28: For ot mate, scosiy SAË 80 autabl for ambient temperatures above 0°C (32 10: Soc your NISSAN doar ir sonic. 9-2 Technical and consumer information [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

FUEL RECOMMENDATION For 2.L engine. Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num- ber (Research octane number 91). For 4.0L engine. Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num- ber (Research octane number 91). For improved vehicle performance, NISSAN rec- ommends the use of unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI number (Research octane number 96). ACAUTION e Using a fuel other than that spe: could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage. e Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst. e Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage the fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN vehicle limited warranty. Gasoline specifications NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the Worid-Wide Fuel Charter specifications where it is available. Many of the automobile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission system and vehicle perfor- mance. Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the Worid-Wide Fuel Charter specifications. Reformulated gasoline Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu- lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug- gests that you use reformulated gasoline when available. Gasoline containing oxygenates Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy- genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with_or without advertising their presence. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel com- patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de- termined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager. If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage. e The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline. e If an oxygenate-blend other than metha- nol blend is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxygenate. (MTBE may, however, be added up to 15%.) e If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corro- sion inhibitors. If not properly formu- lated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not avail able to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN ve- hicles. Technical and consumer information 9-3 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

If any driveabilty problems such as engine stall- ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE. Take care not to spill gasoline during refu- eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage. E-85 fuel E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region. Aftermarket fuel additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec- tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc) which are sold commercially Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine. 9-4 Technical and consumer information Octane rating tips Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se- vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN not responsible. incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage. lf any of the above symptoms are en- countered, have your vehicle checked at a NISSAN dealer. However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light Spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load. À CAUTION e Your vehicle is not designed to run on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E-85 fuel can damage fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. e E-85is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. e U.S. government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be ident fied by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbrevia- tion or the appropriate percentage for that region. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie +

API certification mark API service symbol WTI0082|

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATION Selecting the correct oil His essential to choose the correct grade, quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. See "Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” earlier in this section. NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy. Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna- tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis- cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica- ion mark on the front of the container. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage. Oil additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not neces- sary when the proper oil type is used and main- tenance intervals are followed. Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used Oil viscosity The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper- ated before the next oil change. The chart “Rec- ommended SAE viscosity number" shows the recommended oil viscosities for the expected ambient temperatures. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause seri- ous engine damage. Selecting the correct oil filter Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter, When re- placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil fikter or its équivalent for the reason described in “Change intervals”. Change intervals The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and fiers. Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding recommended oil and filter change intervals could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incor- rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war- ranty. Technical and consumer information 9-5 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie +

Your engine was filed with a high-quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle. Operation under the following conditions may require more fréquent oil and filter changes: + repeated short distance driving at cold out- side temperatures © driving in dusty conditions extensive idling e_towing a trailer stop and go commuting Refer to the "NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for the maintenance schedule. 9-6 Technical and consumer information Outside Temperature Range Anticipated Before Next Oil Change

RECOMMENDATIONS The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refriger- ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, NISSAN A/C system oil Type S or the exact equiva- lents. ACAUTION The use of any other refrigerant or cause severe damage to the air con ing system and will require the replace- ment of all air conditioner system components. The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth's ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth's atmosphere, certain government regula- tions require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys- tem service. À NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refriger- ant. Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner system. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

SPECIFICATIONS ENGINE Model QR25DE VO4ODE Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder in-line 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60° Bore x Stroke in (mm). 8.5 x 3.9 (89.0 x 100.0) 3.760 x 3.622 (95.5 x 92) Displacement cu in (em°) 151.82 (2,488) 241.80 (8,954) Firing order 1-8-4-2 1-2-8-4-5-6 Idie speed AIT (in “N' position) See the “Emission Control Information label” on the underside of the hood. Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed) CO % at idle Standard PLZKAR6A-1 1 PLFR5A-11 Spark plug Hot PLZKARSA-11 PLFRAA-11 Cold_PLZKAR7A-11 PLFRGA-11 Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) _0.048 (1.1) 0.048 (1.1) Camshaft operation Timing chain Timing chain The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Technical and consumer information 9-7 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05—debbie

WHEELS AND TIRES DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

COUNTRY When planning to drive your NISSAN ve- hicle in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi- cle's engine. Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage. Al gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. There- fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available. When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations. The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis- sion control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; there- fore, vehicle specifications may differ. When any vehicle is to be taken into an- other country, state, province or district cations, transpor- tation, and registration are the responsibi ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

(VIN) PLATE The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is attached as shown. This number is the identifica- tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(chassis number) The vehicle identification number is located as shown. Technical and consumer information 9-9 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

LTI0136| LTIO127 FMVS.S./C.M.V.S.S. LTI0130 VO4ODE engine CERTIFICATION LABEL The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety QR25DE engine Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la- bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as shown. able vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axe Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review it carefully. 9-10 Technical and consumer information [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

LTI0133)| LTI0135)| LTI0133)| EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL The emission control information label is at- tached as shown.

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. The label is located as shown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL The air conditioner specification label is affixed as shown. Technical and consumer information 9-11 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

LTI0137| Use the following steps to mount the front license plate:

1. Make holes on the plastic finisher at the

location mark (small dimple) using a 0.87 in (9.5 mm) drill. Apply light pressure to the drill. Insert two plastic grommets provided. Install the license plate holder using the two bolts (and washers) provided.

2. Mount the license plate using two M6-

14mm bolts. License plate bolt tightening torque:

3.8 - 4.7 ft-Ib (5.10 - 6.37 Nm)

9-12 Technical and consumer information

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

A WARNING e Itis extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri- ously injured or killed. © Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. TERMS It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle: © Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional equipment, flu- ids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not in- clude passengers and cargo. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- ing) - maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, pas- sengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. This information is lo- cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.SsS. label. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle. This informa- tion is located on the FM.V.S.S./C.M.V.SsS. label. GCWR (Gross Combined Weight rating) - The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

© Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, Total load capacity - maximum total weight limit specified of the load (passengers and cargo) for the ve- hicle. This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue weight must be in- cluded as part of the cargo load. This information is located on the Tire and Loading Information label (if so equipped). e Cargo capacity - permissible weight of cargo, the subtracted weight of occupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. Both the GVWR and GAWR are located on the FM.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label. See "Measurement of Weights” later in this section. Do not exceed the load limit of your ve- hicle shown as "The combined weight of occupants and cargo” on the Tire and Loading Information label (if so equipped). Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as "Seating Capacity” on Tire and Loading Information label (if so equipped). To get "the combined weight of occu- pants and cargo”, add the weight of all occupants, then add the total luggage weight. Examples are shown in the follow- ing illustration. Technical and consumer information 9-13 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

[ Occupants Luggage Trailer Tongue ‘\ Load limit £ ° Weight Remaining available 1400 |— ÊÉT] D] |— cargo and luggage (640 kg) + + e load capacity = 1501bx2=300lb 30Ibx2=601b 3001b 740 1b (Go kg) (135kg) (14kg) (27kg) (135 kg) D. (336 ko) ff. Occupants Luggage \ Load limit Reraining available 14001 |— & ss + EC cargo and luggage (640 kg) load capacity = 150 Ib x 2 = 300 Ib 30 1bx2=601b 1,040 Ib (2 (70 ka) (135 kg) Gakg) (E7kg) (72 kg) a Occupants Luggage D Load limit Rermaining available (640 kg) load capacity = 150 lb x 5 = 750 lb 301bx5 = 150 1b 500 lb ([ GOkg) (340 kg) (akg) (GOkg) (227 kg) LTI0152 Example 9-14 Technical and consumer information Steps for determining correct load limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs” on your vehicle's placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

8. Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-

able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 Ib. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail- able cargo and luggage load capac- ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150) = 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) = 300 kg.) [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,

load from your trailer will be trans- ferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this re- duces the available cargo and lug- gage load capacity of your vehicle. Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. See “Measurement of Weights” later in this section. Also check tires for proper inflation pres- sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa- tion label. LTI0102|

For your convenience, tie down hooks (if so equipped) are placed at each corner of the truck box. These may be used to help secure cargo loaded into the truck box. A WARNING + Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or Shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col- lision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. e Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRS. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury. Technical and consumer information 9-15 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/26/05—tbrooks 1

LTI0107| Side channels Header channel Channel sections . Floor channels

UTILI-TRACK"" CHANNEL SYSTEM

(if so equipped) Bon 9-16 Technical and consumer information A WARNING e Properly install and tighten the tie- down cleats into the Utili-track" chan- nel system. Also, do not attach any rope or straps directly to the channel. Failure to properly install the tie-down cleats or attaching ropes or straps directly to the channel can cause the cargo to become unsecured. In a sudden stop or colli- Sion, unsecured cargo could cause per- sonal injury. e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or Shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. The Utili-track" channel system allows you to move tie-down clamps in the bed to the best location to secure a load. The tie-down cleats must be installed so the clamp is properly seated in the notches in the rail Ithe tie-down cleat is not seated in the notches, it will not be flush with the rail and cannot be properly tightened. The bolt in the center of the cleat must be tightened hand tight (20 — 40 inch pounds) Check the tightness of the tie-down cleat peri- odically during a trip to make sure the center bolt has not become loose. Install the tie-down cleat as follows:

1. Remove the channel protectors by sliding

them out the back of the truck bed. Properly store the channel protectors.

2. Loosen the center bolt completely.

lar to the channel as shown. Then rotate the cleat clockwise 90° and slide it to the de- sired location. LTI0104|

4. Position the cleat so the nubs on the bottom

fully seat into the channel detents. Technical and consumer information 9-17 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

5. There should be no gap between the bottom

of the cleat and the top of the channel Tighten the center bolt hand tight (20-40 inch pounds). 9-18 Technical and consumer information [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

LTI0106| ACAUTION e Install only one cleat per section of channel. e Applying loads at angles to the cleats greater then 45° or loads greater than 150 lbs. (header and floor channels) or 200 Ibs. (side channels) may cause damage to the channel or bed. Technical and consumer information 9-19 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

LTI0123 WTI0119| 1 correct installation, 2 incorrect installation A WARNING Do not install accessories over the gap between the front and rear side channels. Doing this could affect the rear structure in certain rear impacts, which could result in serious injury. 9-20 Technical and consumer information ACAUTION Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to prevent it from sliding or shifting. Use the channel end stoppers to help se- cure items in the channels from sliding off the end of the truck bed. Channel End Stoppers (if so equipped) The channel end stoppers should be used to help prevent accessories installed in the channels from sliding or shifting off the end of the truck bed. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

They must be installed so they are properly seated in the detents in the channel. Install the channels end stoppers as follows:

1. Remove the channel protectors by sliding

them out the back of the truck bed. Properly store the channel protectors.

2. Loosen the bolt on the center of the end

stopper with the provided wrench and insert it into the channel.

3. Position the end stopper to the desired lo-

cation on the channel so the nubs on the bottom of the end stopper fully seat into the channel detents.

4. Tighten the bolt on the center of the end

stopper with the provided wrench LOADING TIPS e The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the FMVS.S./CM.VS.S. certification label. e Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR. A WARNING e Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seat- backs. In a sudden stop or colli- sion, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury. e Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRSs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could oc- cur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause per- sonal injury. e Overloading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tire, but can also cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer brak- ing distances. This may cause a premature e failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicle’s warranty. Technical and consumer information 9-21 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

Crew Cab models should not be used to carry a slide-in camper.

This information is provided for you to properly install a slide-in camper and is based on the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations. Ît is recommended that, before in- stalling the camper, you carefully read the follow- ing information and ensure that the camper meets the specifications. This information may not apply to some Canada model vehicles.

SPECIAL BODY VEHICLES

Some vehicles are equipped with commercial or camper bodies. However, this Owner's Manual does not cover these options. For further infor- mation, please refer to the body manufacturer's instruction manual. 9-22 Technical and consumer information Recommended cargo center of gravity } location

LIT À Recommended cargo center of gravity location LTI0129|

LOCATION FOR CENTER OF

GRAVITY The illustration indicates the recommended cargo center of gravity location. King Cab: Li = 1054 mm (41.5 in) A WARNING Improper loading may be dangerous. If a load is too far back, it can affect handling characteristics. If a load is too far forward, the front axle may be overloaded. When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load of the truck consists of the camper manufacturer's weight figure, plus e the weight of installed additional camper equipment not included in the camper manufacturer's weight figure, e_the weight of camper cargo, © _ and the weight of occupants in the camper. The total cargo load should not exceed the truck's pay load weight rating and the camper's center of gravity should fall within the truck's recommended center of gravity location when installed. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

A WARNING Overloading or improper loading can ad- versely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance and may lead to accidents.

VEHICLE LOAD WEIGHT CAPACITY

The vehicle load weight capacity shown on fol- lowing charts indicate the maximum total weight of passengers, optional equipment (air condition- ing, trailer hitch, etc) and cargo that your vehicle is designed to carry. Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. See "Vehicle Loading Information” earlier in this section for details. Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. See the tire placard Technical and consumer information 9-23 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not ex- ceed either of the gross axle weight rat- ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label. If weight ratings are exceeded, move or re- move items to bring all weights below the ratings.

A WARNING Overloading or improper loading of a trailer and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and perfor- mance and may lead to accidents. À CAUTION e Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. e For the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads. Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri- marily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember that towing a trailer places additional loads on your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak- ing and other systems. A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This guide includes information on trailer towing ca- pability and the special equipment required for proper towing.

Maximum trailer loads Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the value specified in the “Towing Load/Specfication” chart found later in this sec- tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight. e_ When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs. (1587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake system MUST be used. The maximum GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) should not exceed the value specified in the following “Towing Load/Specification” chart. Technical and consumer information 9-25 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

LTI0161 The GCWR equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo) plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater than these or using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance. The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro- priate for level highway driving may have to be reduced for low traction situations (for example, on slippery boat ramps). Temperature conditions can also affect towing For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside temperatures on graded roads can affect engine performance and cause overheating. The engine protection mode, which helps reduce the chance of engine damage, could activate and automati- cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather and road conditions. A WARNING Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a col- on. Be especially careful when driving. ull to the side of the road to a safe area. Allow the engine to cool and return to normal operation. See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. À CAUTION Vehicle damage resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by NISSAN warranties. 9-26 Technical and consumer information Total trailer load Tongue load [] om 1 Sri Tongue load —Tongue load - % Toialtralertoag * 190-1010 15 WTI0160| Tongue load When using a weight carrying or a weight distrib- uting hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 - 15 percent of the total trailer load within the maximum tongue load limits shown in the follow ing “Towing Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

o © a Gross vehicle weight

Gross axle weight CA0036) Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)/maximum Gross Axle Weight (GAW) The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) shown on the FM.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The GVW equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must not exceed the Gross Ale Weight Rating (GAWR) shown on the F.MV.S.S/C.MV.S.S. certification label. Towing capacities are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle's maximum towing capacity and trailer tongue load. The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity. All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured using platform type scales commonly found at truck stops, highway weigh stations, building supply centers or salvage yards. To determine the available payload capacity for tongue load, use the following procedure.

1. Locate the GVWR on the

EMVS.S./C.M.V.SsS. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of

the passengers and cargo that are normally in the vehicle when towing a trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the

GVWR. The remaining amount is the avail- able maximum tongue load. To determine the available towing capacity, use the following procedure.

1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the

"Towing_ Load/Specification” chart found later in this section.

2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the

GCWR. The remaining amount is the avail- able maximum towing capacity. To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh your trailer on a scale with all equipment and cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is towed. Make sure the Gross Trailer Weight is not more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the trailer and is not more than the calculated available maximum towing capacity Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Ade Weight are not more than Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight on the FMV.S.S./C.MV.S.S. certification label. The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to be moved or removed to meet the specified rat- ings. Example: © Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed on a scale- including passengers, cargo and hitch - 5,185 Ib. (2352 kg). © Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from FMV.S.S/C.MVS.S. certification label - 5,815 lb. (2638 kg). Technical and consumer information 9-27 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/26/05—tbrooks 1

Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) from “Towing Load/Specification” chart - 11,138 lb. (5050 kg). Maximum Trailer towing capacity from “Tow- ing Load/Specification" chart - 6,100 Ib. (2767 kg). 5,815 lb. (2638 kg) GVWR — 5,185 Ib. (2352 kg) Gvw = 630 Ib. (286 kg) Available for tongue weight 11,133 Ib. (6050 kg) GCWR — 5.185 Ib. (2352 kg) Gvw = 5,948 lb. (2698 kg) Capacity available for tow- ing 630 lb. (286 kg) Avaïlable tongue weight 1 5,948 lb. (2698 kg) Available capacity = 10.6 % tongue weight In this case, the available towing capacity is 152 1b. (69 kg) less than the maximum towing capac- ity due to the passenger and cargo load in the vehicle. 9-28 Technical and consumer information Trailer frontal area À CAUTION Exceeding the maximum trailer frontal area specification may exceed the towing capacity of the vehicle. This may affect the towing performance and lead to vehicle damage. The trailer frontal area affects the towing load of a trailer. The frontal area is the total area of the vehicle and trailer that is affected by air resis- tance while towing. Do not exceed the maximum trailer frontal area specification shown in the "Towing Load/Specification" chart. The frontal area can be determined by multiplying the width of the trailer by the height of the trailer. For example, a trailer that is 8 feet wide by 6 feet tall has a trailer frontal area of 48 square feet. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

7.936 Ib. (8,600 kg)

e_ The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle's maximum towing capacity. © All towing above 1,000 Ib (454 kg) requires the use of trailer brakes. NISSAN recommends the use of a tandem axle trailer whenever towing above 3,000 Ib (1,861 kg). +2: The maximum towing capacity when using the genuine NISSAN step bumper as a ball mount is 8,500 Ib. (1,588 kg) and 350 lb. (158 kg) tongue load Technical and consumer information 9-29 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie +

TOWING SAFETY Trailer hitch Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional trailer tow package. The trailer tow package in- cludes a receiver-type frame mounted hitch. This hitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity of this vehicle when the proper towing equipment is used. Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ball that is rated for the trailer to be towed. Genuine Nissan ball mounts and hitch balls are available from your NISSAN dealer. H your vehicle is not equipped with the optional trailer tow package, check the towing capacity of your bumper hitch or receiver-type frame mounted hitch. Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer. À genuine Nissan trailer hitch is available from your NISSAN dealer. Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks. 9-30 Technical and consumer information A WARNING r hitch components have specific ht ratings. Your vehicle may be ca- pable of towing a trailer heavier than the weight rating of the hitch components. Never exceed the weight rating of the hitch components. Doing so can cause serious personal injury or property damage. Hitch ball Choose a hitch ball ofthe proper size and weight rating for your trailer: e_ The required hitch ball size is stamped on most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also have the size printed on the top of the bal. © Choose the proper class hitch ball based on the trailer weight © The diameter of the threaded shank of the hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should be no more than 1/16" smaller than the hole in the ball mount. e_ The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be long enough to be properly secured to the ball mount. There should be at least 2 threads showing beyond the lock washer and nut. Ball mount The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver. Choose a proper class ball mount based on the trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the ground. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

LTI0132| Bumper towing The genuine NISSAN step bumper has provi- sions to install a trailer hitch ball and is designed to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 3,500 Ib (1,588 kg) To install a trailer hitch ball cut out the circle inthe center of the step bumper @, then remove it to install the trailer hitch ball. Weight carrying hitches À weight carrying or "dead weight” ball mount is one that is designed to carry the whole amount of tongue weight and gross weight directly on the ball mount and on the receiver. Weight distribution hitch This type ofhitch is also called a “load-leveling" or “equalizing" hitch. À set of bars attach to the ball mount and to the trailer to distribute the tongue weight (hitch weight) of your trailer. Many ve- hicles can't carry the full tongue weight of a given trailer, and need some of the tongue weight transferred through the frame and pushing down on the front wheels. This gives stability to the tow vehicle. Another reason to have a weight distributing ball mount is to comply with the rating on your re- ceiver. Most receivers have a weight carrying rating of 5,000 lbs. gross weight, 500 lbs. tongue weight and a weight distribution rating of 10,000 lbs. gross weight, 1,000 lbs. tongue weight. This means that without using a weight distributing ballmount, the receiver is only designed to carry 5,000 lbs. When hooking up a trailer using a weight distrib- uting hitch, always refer to the hitch manufactur- er's instructions.

1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface.

With the ignition on and the doors closed, allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes s0 that it can level.

2. Measure the height of a reference point on

the front and rear bumpers at the center of the vehicle.

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust

the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper height is within O - 5 inches (0 — 13 mm) of the reference height measured in step 2. The rear bumper should be no higher than the reference height measured in step 2. A WARNING Properly adjust the weight distributing h so the rear of the bumper is no her than the measured reference height when the trailer is attached. If the rear bumper is higher than the measured reference height when loaded, the vehicle may handle unpredictably which could cause a loss of vehicle control and cause serious personal jury or property damage. Class | hitch Class | trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 Ib (909 kg). Technical and consumer information 9-31 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

Class Il hitch Class Il trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 3,500 Ib (1,510 kg). The genuine NISSAN step bumper is considered a Class I ball mount. Class Ill hitch Class Ill trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 5,000 Ib (2,272 kg). Class IV hitch Class IV trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 10,000 Ib (4,545 kg). A weight distributing hitch should be used to tow trailers that weigh over 5,000 Ib (2,272 kg) Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IV trailer hitch equipment that has a 10,000 lb (4,545 kg) maximum weight rating, but your ve- hicle is only capable of towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the “Towing Load/Specification” chart earlier in this section. 9-32 Technical and consumer information À CAUTION Special hitches which include frame re- inforcements are req, d for towing above 2,000 Ib (907 kg). Suitable genu- ine NISSAN hitches, ball mounts and hitch balls for pickup trucks and sport utility vehicles are available at a NISSAN dealer. The hitch should not be attached to or affect the operation of the impact- absorbing bumper. Do not use axle-mounted hitches. Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys- tem, brake system, etc. to install a trailer hitch. To reduce the possibility of additional damage if your vehi is struck from the rear, where practical, remove the hitch and/or receiver when not in use. Regularly check that all trailer hitch mounting bolts are securely mounted. When towing with the hitch ball mounted to the rear bumper, do not make sharp turns. The trailer may con- tact the bumper and cause damage to the bumper or trailer. Tire pressures © When towing a trailer, inflate the ve- hicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. © Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturer's specifications. Safety chains Always use suitable safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper or axle. The safety chains can be attached to the bumper if the hitch ball is mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leave enough slack in the chains to permit tuming comers. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/26/05—tbrooks 1

Trailer lights À CAUTION When splicing into the vehicle electrical system, a commercially available power- type module/converter must be used to provide power for all trailer lighting. This unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and turn signal circuits as a signal source. The module/converter must draw no more that 15 mps from the stop and tail lamp circuits. Using a module/converter that exceeds these power requirements may damage the vehicle’s electrical sys- tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob- tain the proper equipment and to have it installed. Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or local regulations. For assistance in hooking up trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu- table trailer dealer. Vehicles equipped with the optional trailer tow package are equipped with a 7-pin trailer harness connector. If your trailer is equipped with a flat 4-pin connector, an adapter will be needed to connect the trailer lights to the vehicle. Adapters are available at NISSAN deal- ers as well as auto parts stores and hitch retail- ers. Trailer brakes © Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve- hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a trailer to the vehicle. H your trailer is equipped with a braking system, make sure it conforms to federal and/or local regulations and that it is properly installed. e Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to A WARNING all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required for towing before Never connect a trailer brake system di- driving the vehicle. rectly to the vehicle brake system. _ © Determine the overall height of the vehicle Pre-towing tips and trailer so the required clearance is e Be certain your vehicle maintains a level known, position when a loaded and/or unloaded Trailer towing tips trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down In order to gain skil and an understanding of the condition; check for improper tongue load, vehicle's behavior, you should practice turning, overload, worn suspension or other possible Stopping and backing up in an area which is free causes of either condition. from traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor- mance will be somewhat different than under + Always secure items in the trailer to prevent normal driving conditions. load shift while driving. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent © Keep the cargo load as low as possible in load shift while driing the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity low. © Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or lock to prevent the coupler from inadvert- © Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the ently becoming unlatched. trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in the back half. Also make sure the load is © Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops. balanced side to side. © Avoïd sharp turns or lane changes. Technical and consumer information 9-33 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

e Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed. When backing up, hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Move your hand in the direction in which you want the trailer to go. Make small corrections and back up slowly. If possible, have someone guide you when you are backing up. Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not recommended; however, if you must do so: À CAUTION If you move the shift selector lever to the P (Park) position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake, transmission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the down hill

side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly

release the brake pedal until the blocks ab- sorb the vehicle load!

4. Apply the parking brake.

5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

9-34 Technical and consumer information

6. Make sure the @& _ indicator light (if so

equipped) indicates the transfer case is in 4H, 4L, or 2H and that the ATP light is off. I the da _indicator light is flashing, or the ATP light is ON, make sure the transmission is in P (Park) (AT) and turn the 4WD switch to 2WD or 4H. See "Automatic transmission park warning light” in the "Instruments and controls” section and "Using four wheel drive” in the "Starting and driving” section.

7. Tu off the engine.

To drive away: . Start the vehicle.

2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are clear from the blocks.

6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.

© When going down a hil, shift into a lower gear and use the engine braking effect. When going up a long grade, downshift the transmission to a lower gear and reduce speed to reduce chances of engine over- loading and/or overheating. However, for long steep grades, do not stay in 1st gear when driving above 35 MPH (56 km/h) or And gear when driving above 58 MPH (03 km/h). IH the engine coolant rises to an extremely high temperature when the air conditioner system is on, turn off the air conditioner. Coolant heat can be additionally vented by opening the windows, switching the fan control to high and setting the temperature control to the HOT position. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances. Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle's first 500 miles (805 km). For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do tow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h). Have your vehicle seviced more often than at intervals specified in the recommended Maintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser- vice and Maintenance Guide”. When making a turn, your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make a larger than normal tuming radius during the turn. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

© Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus- ing vehicle sway. When being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect ve- hicle handling Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to

allow the vehicle to coast and steer as straight ahead as the road conditions allow. This combination will help stabilize the vehicle - Do not correct trailer sway by steering or applying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the

brakes and pull to the side of the road in a safe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-

anced as described earlier in this section. e Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing while towing a trailer requires con- siderably more distance than normal pass- ing. Remember, the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes. © Down shift the transmission to a lower gear for engine braking when driving down steep or long hills. This wi help slow the vehicle without applying the brakes. To maintain engine braking efficiency and electrical charging performance, do not use overdrive. Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency. Increase your following distance to allow for greater stopping distances while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually Do not use cruise control while towing a trailer. Some states or provinces have specific regu- lations and speed limits for vehicles that are towing trailers. Obey the local speed limits. Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con- nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50 miles (80 km) of travel and at every break. When stopped in traffic for long periods of time in hot weather, put the vehicle in the P (Park) position: When launching a boat, don't allow the wa- ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or rear bumper. Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights before backing the trailer into the water or the trailer lights may burn out. When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil should be replaced and transmission oil/fluid should be changed more fre- quently. For additional information, see the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section earlier in this manual. FLAT TOWING Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home. A CAUTION e Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage. + Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al- ways tow forward, never backward. + DO NOT tow any automatic transmis- sion vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication. «+ For emergency towing procedures refer to “Towing recommended by NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. Technical and consumer information 9-35 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

Automatic Transmission To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST. be placed under the towed vehicle's drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturers recommendations when using their product. Manual Transmission + Always tow with the manual transmission in Neutral. e On four-wheel drive vehicles, place the transfer case in the 2H range. Failure to do so will cause the powertrain to bind up. © After towing 500 miles (805 km), start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neu- ral for two minutes. Failure to idle the engine after every 500 miles (805 km) of towing may cause damage to internal transmission parts.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov- ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction AA, À, B and C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, À, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as mea- sured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and con- crete. À tire marked C may have poor traction performance. 9-36 Technical and consumer information A WARNING The traction grade assigned to this based on straight-ahead braking tra tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction character S. Temperature À, B and C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces- sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor- mance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.

109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

A WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is es- tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei- ther separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible tire failure.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARRANTY Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties: For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor- mation Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. f you did not receive a Warranty Informa- tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re- placement by writing to: e_ Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department PO. Box 191 Gardena, CA 90248-0191 For Canada Emission Control System Warranty Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor- mation Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. f you did not receive a Warranty Informa- tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re- placement by writing to: e_ Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario, LAW 4Z5

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US

only) If you believe that your vehicle has a de- fect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immedi- ately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi- tion to notifying NISSAN. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be- come involved in individual problems be- tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve- hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888- 327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to htip://www.safercar.gov ; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov . You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1. Technical and consumer information 9-37 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

Due to legal requirements in some states and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re- quired to be in what is called the “ready condi- tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system. The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle. I a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a “not ready" condition. Before taking the UM test check the vehicle's inspection/maintenance test readiness condi- tion. Turn the ignition switch ON without starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is "not ready”. If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is "ready." f the MIL indicates the vehicle is in a not ready” con- dition, drive the vehicle through the following pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. If you cannot or do not want to perform the driving pattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you. 9-38 Technical and consumer information A WARNING Always drive the vehicle in a safe and prudent manner according to traffic con- ions and obey all traffic laws.

. Start the engine when the engine coolant temperature gauge needle points to C. AI- low the engine to idle until the gauge needle points between the C and H (normal oper- ating temperature). . Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h), then quickly release the accelerator pedal completely and keep it released for at least 10 seconds.

8. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a

moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of

53 - 60 MPH (86 - 96 km/h) for at least 9

Stop the vehicle. .… Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h) and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.

Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times. . Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h) and maintain the speed for at least 3 min- utes.

8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission se-

lector lever in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position.

9. Turn the engine off.

10. Repeat steps 1 - 8 at least one more time.

If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted, repeat the preceding step. Any safe driving mode is accept- able between steps. Do not stop the engine until step 7 is completed. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

Your vehicle is equipped with a variety of comput- ers that monitor and control a number of systems to optimize performance and help service techni- cians with diagnosis and repair. Depending on the equipment on your vehicle, some oftthe com- puters monitor emission control systems, braking systems, engine systems, transmission systems, tire pressure systems, and airbag systems. Some data about vehicle operation may be stored in the computer for use during servicing. Other data may be stored if a crash event occurs. For ex- ample, air bag readiness, air bag performance, and seat belt use by the driver or passenger may be recorded, depending on vehicle equipment. These types of systems are sometimes called Event Data Recorders. Special equipment can be used to access the electronic data that may be stored in the vehicle's computers (sounds are not recorded). NISSAN and NISSAN dealers have equipment to access some of this data; others may also have this equipment. The data may be retrieved during routine vehicle servicing or for special research. lt might also be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee, in response to a request by law enforcement, or as otherwise required or permitted by law.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

À genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro- cedures, this manual is the same one used by the factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN dealerships. Also available are genuine NISSAN Ouner's Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Service and Owner's Manuals for older NISSAN models. For USA For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model year and later contact: Tweddie Litho Company 1-800-450-9491 www.nissan-techinfo.com For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact: Resolve Corporation 20770 Westwood Road Strongsville, OH 44136 1-800-247-5321 For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Owner's Manuals for this model year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact: Resolve Corporation 20770 Westwood Road Strongsville, OH 44136 1-800-247-5321 For Canada To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser- vice Manual or Owners Manual please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num- ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800- 387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa- tive will assist you: Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and Ovwner's Manuals for older NISSAN models.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

Unfortunately, accidents do oceur. In this unlikely event, there is some important information you should know. Many insurance companies routinely authorize the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to cut costs, among other reasons. Technical and consumer information 9-39 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

Insist on the use of genuine NISSAN collision parts! If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts made to NISSAN's original exacting specifica- tions — if you want to help it to last and hold its resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your insurance agent and your repair shop to only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts. NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts, nor does NISSAN's warranty apply to damage caused by a non-genuine part. Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect your personal safety, preserve your warranty pro- tection and maintain the resale value of your vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un- necessary excess wear and tear expenses at the end of your lease. NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non- genuine (imitation) parts may not provide such built-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts of- ten show premature wear, rust and corrosion. 9-40 Technical and consumer information Why should you take a chance? In over 40 states, the law says you must be advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair your vehicle. And some states have enacted laws that restrict insurance companies from authoriz- ing the use of non-genuine collision parts during the new vehicle warranty. These laws help pro- tect you, so you can take action to protect your- self. H's your right! If you should need further information visit us at www.nissanusa.com. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

10 Index AWD warning light . .............. 2-15 Active brake limited si GLS) system (if so equipped) . Active head restraint Air bag (See supplemental restraint system) Air bag system Front (See supplemental front impact air bag system) . ....... see Air bag warning labels . . . . .. Air bag warning light. . Air cleaner housing filter . . . ........ Air conditioner Air conditioner operation. Air conditioner service . Air conditioner specification label . Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations Heater and air conditioner controls . Servicing air conditioner . Air flow charts Alarm system (See vehicle security system) . . Anchor point locations . . . . . . Antenna . ............. Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . Anti-lock brake warning light. . . .. .... Audible reminders. . . ............. Audio system . ............. Compact Disc (CD) changer . Compact disc (CD) player. . . .. .... FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD) player . Radio .... Steering wheel audio control switch Autolight switch. ............ Automatic Automatic power window switch Automatic transmission position indicator light Driving with automatic transmission Transmission selector lever lock release. ............... Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . Battery. ........... Charge warning light .… Before starting the engine Belts (See drive belts) . . . Booster seats. . ...... Brake Antock brake system (ABS) ee Brake booster . Brake fluid . Brake light (See stop light). Brake pedal Le Brake system . ............... Brake waming light. ............ Brake wear indicators . . Parking brake check Parking brake operation . . . . Self-adjusting brakes Break-in schedule. . . ....... Brightness control Instrument panel . ....... 2-28 Bulb check/instrument panel. . .…. 2-12 Bulb replacement. . ........ 8-29

Cluich interlock (clutch start) switch . . . . . 2-33 C.MV.S.S. certification label. . 9-10 Cold weather driving . . ..... 5-38 Compact disc (CD) player . . . . 4-19 Compass display . Console box. . . Controls Audio controls (steering wheel) . . . . . Heater and air conditioner controls . . . . . 4-2 Coolant Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. . . .... Changing engine coolant Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . . 8-8 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . 2-6 Corrosion protection. .............. 7-5 Cruise control. . ....5-18 Cup holders. . . 2-41 Curtain side-impact and rollover air bag . . .1-61 Daytime running light system (Canada only). ................. 2-27 Defroster switch Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch. ................... Dimensions and weights Dimmer switch for instrument panel . Drive belts. ............ 8-18 Driving Cold weather driving . . .......... 5-33 Driving with automatic transmission. . . .5-11 10-2 Driving with manual transmission... 5-14 Precautions when starting and driving . .5-2

• Economy - fuel p. 5
• -20 Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system p. 5
• -25 Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system switch Emission control information label Emission control system warranty p. 2
• Engine Before starting the engine p. 5
• -9 Capacities and recommended fuel/ubricants p. 9
• -2 Changing engine coolant p. 8
• -9 Changing engine oil … Changing engine oil filter Checking engine coolant level p. 8
• -8 Checking engine oil level p. 8
• -2 Engine compartment check locations p. 8
• -8 Engine coolant temperature gauge p. 2
• -6 Engine cooling system p. 8
• -8 Engine oil p. 8
• -9 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation -5 Engine oil pressure warning light Engine oil viscosity . Engine serial number Engine specifications Starting the engine . Engine oil pressure gauge Event data recorders . Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) p. 9

• Lock Child safety rear door lock Door locks Power door locks Low fuel warning light
• Low tire pressure warning light 2-15 Low washer fluid warning light. 2-16 Luggage rack (see roof rack) -43 Luggage (See vehicle loading information) 9-12 Maintenance General maintenance Inside the vehicle Maintenance precautions Outside the vehicle … . Seat belt maintenance Under the hood and vehicle . Malfunction indicator light Manual front seat adjustment Manual windows Map lights Map pocket p. 2
• Meters and gauges Instrument brightness control 2-28 Mirror Automatic anti-glare inside mirror p. 3
• -13 Inside mirror p. 8
• -18 Outside mirrors -14 Vanity mirror . 8-12 Multi-remote control system (See remote keyless entry system) à 3-6 10-4 p. 8

• NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system p. 2
• -29, 8-2, 5-9 Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) p. 9
• -4 Odometer Oil Capacities and recommended fuel/ubricants. Changing engine oil Changing engine oil filter Checking engine oil level Engine oil Engine oil and oil lter recommendation . 9-5 Engine oil viscosity . Outside mirrors Overdrive switch p. 24
• Overheat I your vehicle overheats Ouner's manual order form Ouners manual/service manual order information -39 Parking Parking brake check … Parking brake operation Parking/parking on hills. Personal lights Power Front seat adjustment . Power door locks Power outlet Power steering fluid Power steering system Power windows Rear power windows p. 9
• Precautions Maintenance precautions p. 8
• -5 On-pavement and off-road driving precautions p. 4
• 5-5 Precautions on child restraints p. 1
• -21, 1-42 Precautions on seat belt usage p. 1
• -12 Precautions on supplemental restraint system p. 1
• -48 Precautions when starting and driving -2 Pre-tensioner seat belt system. Push starting Radio Car phone or CB radio p. 5
• Compact Disc (CD) changer . FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD) player -16, 4-20 Steering wheel audio control switch. … . Readiness for inspection maintenance (1/M) Rear power windows Rear sliding window Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1 p. 4

Recorders Event data. . Refrigerant recommendation Registering your vehicle in another country. . 9-9 Remote keyless entry system Reporting safety defects (US only) . 9-87 Roof rack 2-48

• Safety Child safety rear door lock 3-6 Child seat belts Reporting safety defects (US only) p. 4
• Seat Jump seat Seat adjustment Front manual seat adjustment . Front power seat adjustment . Seat belt Child safety p. 1
• -14 Infants and small children. 1-15 Injured Person 1-16 Larger children. 1-15 Precautions on seat belt usage . 1-12 Pregnant women p. 1
• -16 Pre-tensioner seat belt system. 1-62 Seat belt extenders p. 1
• -20 Seat belt maintenance p. 1
• -21 Seat belts p. 1
• -12 Shoulder belt height adjustment . 1-20 Three-point type with retractor 1-16 Seat belt warning light -16 Seatback pockets p. 2
• : -40 Seats Adjustment Front seats Heated seats Manual front seat adjustment p. 2
• Security indicator light Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system), engine start -29, 3-2, 5-9 Self-adjusting brakes Service manual order form . Servicing air conditioner Shift lock release Shifting Automatic transmission. Manual transmission Shoulder belt height adjustment Side air bag system (See supplemental side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag systems). Spark plug replacement Speedometer SRS warning label Starting Before starting the engine Jump starting p. 2
• Precautions when string and driving -2 Push starting . Starting the engine . Steering Power steering fluid. Power steering system . Tilting steering wheel Steering wheel audio control switch Stop light . Storage Storage tray EL Sun visors p. 5
• Sunglasses case . Sunroof Supplemental air bag waming labels p. 1
• -64 Supplemental air bag waming light p. 1
• -64, 2-16 Supplemental front impact air bag system p. 1
• -56 Supplemental restraint system Information and warning labels. …. 1-64 Precautions on supplemental restraint system p. 1
• -48 Supplemental restraint system (Supplemental air bag system) -48 Switch Autolight switch Automatic power window switch Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) system switch p. 1
• Fog light switoh .2-33 Hazard warning flasher switch p. 2
• -29 Headlight and turn signal switch p. 2
• -95 Headlight control switch .… Hill descent control (HDC) switch p. 2
• -31 Ignition switch Overdrive switch switch p. 2
• -24 Tum signal switch p. 2
• -28 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch p. 2
• -31 Windshield wiper and washer switch -28 10-5 [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1 p. 2

• Tachometer p. 2
• -6 Tailgate latch Temperature gauge Engine coolant temperature gauge p. 2
• -6 Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer x system), engine start p. 2
• -29, 8-2, 5-9 Three-way catal ist p. 5
• -2 Tie down hooks p. 8
• -17 Tiking steering wheel p. 8
• -11 Tire Flat tire p. 6
• -2 Spare tire . 6-4 Tire chains. 8-40 Tire placard . 8-11 Tire pressure 8-32 Tire rotation p. 8
• -40 Tires of 4-wheel drive. - 8-42 Types of tres p. 8
• -39 Uniform tire quality grading. 9-36 Wheels and tires p. 8
• -32 Wheel/tire size p. 9
• -8 Tire pressure Low tire pressure warning light p. 2
• -15 Tire pressure monitoring system p. 5
• -8 Top tether strap child restraint 1-36 Towing 2-wheel drive models. «6-12 4-wheel drive models. «6-13 Flat towing p. 9
• -35 Tow truck towing 6-11 Towing load/specification 9-29 Trailer towing 9-25 10-6 Transceiver HomeLink® Universal Transceiver p. 2
• -50 Transmission Driving with automatic transmission p. 5
• -11 Driving with manual transmission -14 Selector lever lock release | 5-18 Travel (See registering our v vehicle in another country) Trip computer Trip odometer Truck - camper loading . Tum signal switch p. 5

Uniform tire quality grading. . . ....... « 9-36 Vanity mirror... .......... Vehicle dimensions and weights Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch. . .2- Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . . . .5- Vehicle identification Vehicle identification number (VIN) (Chassis number). . ..............« Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . Vehicle loading information. Vehicle recovery. . . . . Vehicle security system. Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system), engine start . .2-22, 3-2, 5-9 Ventilators. . . . Visors . . Voltmeter . . .. Warning 4WD warning light . Air bag warning light. . Anti-lock brake warning light... Battery charge warning light . Brake warning light . Door open warning light . . Engine oil pressure warning ion. . Hazard warning flasher switoh . Low fuel warning light . . . ..... Low tire pressure waming light : . - Low washer fluid warning light. Passenger air bag and status light. . Seat belt warning light . . .. .. Vehicle security system. Warning labels (for SRS). Waringiniator light and audible reminders . . . Warning lights. .… Washer switch Windshield wiper and washer switch Weights (See dimensions and weights) . Wheels and tires . ........... Wheel/tire size . When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country. Lee . Window washer fluid . [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

RECOMMENDED FUEL: For 2.L engine. Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num- ber (Research octane number 91). For 4.0L engine. Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num- ber (Research octane number 91). For improved vehicle performance, NISSAN rec- ommends the use of unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI number (Research octane number 96). À CAUTION e Using a fuel other than that specifi could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage. e Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst. e Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage the fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN vehicle limited warranty. For additional information, see “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the “Technical and consumer information" section. RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL: OR25DE Engine e_ API Certification Mark e_ API grade SG/SH Energy Conserving | & Il or API grade SJ or SL Energy Conserving e_ILSAC grade GF-l, GF-Il or GF-IIl e_5W-30 Viscosity preferred See “Engine oil and oi filter recommendation” in the “Technical and consumer information” sec- tion of this manual. VO4ODE Engine e_ API Certification Mark e_ API grade SL, Energy Conserving e_ILSAC grade GF-III e_ 5W-30 Viscosity preferred See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” in the “Technical and consumer information” sec- tion of this manual. TIRE COLD PRESSURE: See Tire and Loading Information label.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE

BREAK:-IN PROCEDURE: During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle use, follow the recommendations outlined in the “BREAK-IN SCHEDULE" information found in the “Starting and driving" section of this manual. Follow these recommendations for the future re- liability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life. [+ REVIEW COPY—2006 Truck/Frontier (d22) (Owners Manual—USA English (nna) 10/17/05 —debbie 1

QUICK REFERENCE CESSE Battery 8-15 Power steering fluid 8-13 Engine coolant 8-8 Window washer fluid 8-15 Automatic transmission fluid 8-13 Heater and air conditioner 4-2; Audio system 4-10